2007 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual M · 2020-03-17 · Safety Warnings and Symbols...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 38Child Restraints ...................................... 61Airbag System ........................................ 90Restraint System Check ....................... 108

Features and Controls .............................. 111Keys ..................................................... 113Doors and Locks .................................. 122Windows ............................................... 132Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 134Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 139Mirrors .................................................. 158OnStar® System ................................... 164Universal Home Remote System .......... 166Storage Areas ...................................... 178Sunroof ................................................ 185

Instrument Panel ....................................... 187Instrument Panel Overview ................... 190Climate Controls ................................... 214Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ... 225Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 244Audio System(s) ................................... 272

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 341Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 342Towing ................................................. 398

Service and Appearance Care .................. 417Service ................................................. 420Fuel ...................................................... 423Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 428All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 469Rear Axle ............................................. 470Front Axle ............................................ 471Headlamp Aiming ................................. 473

2007 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual M

1

Bulb Replacement ................................ 476Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 478Tires ..................................................... 480Appearance Care .................................. 526Vehicle Identification ............................. 535Electrical System .................................. 537Capacities and Specifications ................ 546

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 547Maintenance Schedule .......................... 548

Customer Assistance Information ............. 569Customer Assistance and Information ... 570Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 588

Index .......................................................... 593

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,GMC, the GMC Truck Emblem, and the namesYUKON and DENALI are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for GMC whenever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15854795 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 12Power Reclining Seatbacks ......................... 14Head Restraints .......................................... 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Heated Seats .............................................. 1760/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) ........ 18Bucket Seats (Second Row) ........................ 25Third Row Seat ........................................... 32

Safety Belts .................................................. 38Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 38Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 42How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 43Driver Position ............................................. 43Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 50Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 51

Right Front Passenger Position ................... 51Center Front Passenger Position ................. 52Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 53Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 56Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 60Safety Belt Extender ................................... 60

Child Restraints ............................................ 61Older Children ............................................. 61Infants and Young Children ......................... 64Child Restraint Systems .............................. 68Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 72Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 74Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 83Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 85Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 86

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 90Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 93When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 96What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 98How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 99What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 100Passenger Sensing System ....................... 101

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 106Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 107

Restraint System Check ............................. 108Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 108Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 109

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Power Seats

The power seat controls are located on theoutboard side of the front seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

The power reclining seatback control is locatedbehind the power seat control on the outboard sideof the seats. See Power Reclining Seatbacks onpage 14.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 12.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

9

Power Lumbar

The controls used to operate the power lumbarfeature are located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

• To increase lumbar support, press and holdthe front of the control.

• To decrease lumbar support, press and holdthe rear of the control.

• To raise the height of the support, press andhold the top of the control.

• To lower the height of the support, press andhold the bottom of the control.

Let go of the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of support.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 12 formore information.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

10

Heated Seats

The seats have theheated seat feature,the buttons usedto control this featureare located on the frontdoors near the doorhandle.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicatethat the feature is working. Press the buttonto cycle through the temperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn the heat to theseatback off. Indicator lights below the button showthe level of heat selected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate thatthe feature is working. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.Indicator lights above the button will show the levelof heat selected: three for high, two for medium,and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If you want touse the heated seat feature after you restart yourvehicle, you will need to press the appropriateheated seat or seatback button again.

11

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and PedalsYour vehicle has the memory package.

The controls for thisfeature are located onthe driver’s doorpanel, and are used toprogram and recallmemory settings for thedriver’s seat, outsidemirrors, and theadjustable throttle andbrake pedal featureif your vehicle has it.

To save your positions in memory, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, andthe throttle and brake pedals to a comfortableposition.

See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors onpage 161 and Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 143 for more information.Not all mirrors will have the ability to save andrecall the mirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps letyou know that the position has been stored.

A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brakepedal position can be programmed by repeatingthe above steps and pressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehiclemust be in PARK (P). Press and release eitherbutton 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desireddriving position. The seat, outside mirrors, andadjustable throttle and brake pedals will move tothe position previously stored. You will hear asingle beep.

If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter toenter your vehicle and the remote recall memoryfeature is on, automatic seat, mirror, andadjustable pedal movement will occur. See“MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262 formore information.

12

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, power mirror buttons, oradjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/orthe adjustable pedals while recalling a memoryposition, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustablepedals recall may stop working. If this happens,press the appropriate control for the area thatis not recalling for two seconds, after theobstruction is removed. Then try recalling thememory position again by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer for service.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position canbe recalled by pressing the exit button. You willhear a single beep. The driver’s seat willmove back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automatic seatmovement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 262 for more information.

Further programming for the memory seat featurecan be done using the DIC. You can select ornot select the following:

• The automatic easy exit seat feature

• The remote memory seat recall feature

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262.

13

Power Reclining Seatbacks

The controls for the power reclining seatback arelocated on the outboard side of the front seatsbehind the power seat control.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of thecontrol rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top ofthe control forward.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

14

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowsseat settings to be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 12.

15

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the releasebutton (A), located onthe top of the seatback,while you push thehead restraint down.

The front seats may have head restraints that alsotilt forward and rearward.

To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of therestraint while pressing the button (B), located onthe right hand side of the head restraint, andmove it forward or rearward until the desiredlocking position is reached. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The second row seats may have head restraintsthat can be adjusted up and down, but they donot tilt.

16

Rear Seats

Heated Seats

The rear seats have theheated seat feature,the buttons usedto control this featureare located on theRear Seat Audio (RSA)panel.

M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion,press the button with the heated seat symbol.

A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSAdisplay to indicate that the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through the temperature settingsof high, medium, and low, and to turn it off.Indicator bars next to the symbol will designatethe level of heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If the vehicleis restarted, the heated seat button will need tobe pressed again to restart the feature.

Driver’s Side RSAHeated Seat Button

Only shown

17

60/40 Split Bench Seat(Second Row)If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s)can be folded for additional cargo space orfolded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to thethird row seats, if your vehicle has them. Theseseats will have either the manual fold and tumblefeature or the automatic seat release fold andtumble feature.

Manual Fold and Tumble FeatureFolding and Tumbling the Seat(s)To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:

1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in frontof, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side ofthe seat, to release the seatback.

18

The seatback will fold forward automatically.Leaving the seatback in this position creates aflat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat, try movingthe front seat forward and/or put the frontseatback in the upright position.

3. Lift the same leveragain to release therear of the seatfrom the floor. Theseat will tumbleforward.

19

Returning the Seat(s) to the SittingPositionTo return the seat to the sitting position, do thefollowing:

1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.The seatback cannot be raised if the seat isnot latched to the floor.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Pushand pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

3. Make sure the safety belt in the centerseating position is not caught between thetwo seats and is not twisted.

20

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from theThird Row Seats

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or folded andtumbled, could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return the seatto the passenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, ifyour vehicle has them, do the following:



2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear ofthe second row seat(s) on the inboard side, torelease the seatback. The seatback will foldforward.

3. Lift the same lever again to release the rearof the seat from the floor. The seat willtumble forward automatically.

21

Automatic Release Fold and TumbleFeatureThe transmission must be in PARK (P) for thisfeature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{CAUTION:

Automatically folding and tumbling theseat when someone is sitting in the seat,could cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressing theautomatic seat release button.

To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:



2. From the frontseats, press one ofthe automaticseat release buttonslocated on theoverhead console.

Overhead ConsoleButtons shown, Panel

Button similar

22

When accessing the third row seats, if yourvehicle has them, from the outside of thevehicle, press the button on the panel behindeither rear door.One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.



{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.


23

{CAUTION:


3. Make sure that the safety belt in the centerseating position is not caught between thetwo seats and is not twisted.

Folding and Tumbling the Second RowSeat(s) from the Third Row Seats orOutside

{CAUTION:


To fold and tumble the seat from the third rowseats, if your vehicle has them, do the following:



24

2. Press the automaticseat release buttonlocated on thepanel behind therear doors.

One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Bucket Seats (Second Row)If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbackscan be reclined, the seats can be folded foradditional cargo space, or folded and tumbledfor easy entry and exit to the third row seats, ifyour vehicle has them. These seats will haveeither the manual fold and tumble feature or theautomatic seat release fold and tumble feature.

Driver’s Side Rear PanelButton shown

25

Reclining SeatbacksTo recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side ofthe seat.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

{CAUTION:



26

Manual Fold and Tumble FeatureFolding and Tumbling the Seat(s)To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:



2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side ofthe seat, to release the seatback.

27

The seatback will fold forward. Leaving theseatback in this position creates a flatload floor.If the seatback cannot fold flat, try movingthe front seat forward and/or put the frontseatback in the upright position.

3. Lift the lever againto release the rearof the seat fromthe floor. The seatwill tumble forward.

28



{CAUTION:



Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from theThird Row Seats

{CAUTION:





29

2. Lift the lever,located on thebottom rear of thesecond row seat onthe inboard side,to release theseatback. Theseatback will foldforward.

3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of theseat from the floor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Release Fold and TumbleFeatureThe transmission must be in PARK (P) for thisfeature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

{CAUTION:

Automatically folding and tumbling theseat when someone is sitting in the seat,could cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressing theautomatic seat release button.

To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:



30

2. From the frontseats, press one ofthe automaticseat release buttonslocated on theoverhead console.

When accessing the third row seats, if yourvehicle has them, from the outside of thevehicle, press the button on the panel behindeither rear door.One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.



{CAUTION:



Overhead ConsoleButtons shown

31

Folding and Tumbling the Second RowSeat(s) from the Third Row Seats orOutside

{CAUTION:





2. Press the automaticseat release buttonlocated on thepanel behind therear doors.

One press of the button automatically folds theseatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.There will be a slight delay between the foldingof the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.

Third Row SeatIf the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s)can be folded and the entire seat can betumbled, or removed from the vehicle.

Driver’s Side Rear PanelButton shown

32

Folding the Seatback(s)To fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate to access the controls forthe seat.

2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.


3. Lift the release lever,located on the bottomrear of the seatbackon the outboardside of the seat, andthe seatback willfold forward.

Unfolding the Seatback(s)To return the seatback to the upright position, dothe following:


2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into theupright position.

{CAUTION:



33

Tumbling the Third Row SeatThe seat can be tumbled forward for additionalcargo space.

To tumble the seat, do the following:


2. Make sure the head rests are completelylowered, there is nothing under, in front of,or on the seat, and all items are removed fromthe cupholder and storage bin, if the seat isa two-passenger seat.

3. Fold the seatbacks forward using theinstructions listed under “Folding theSeatbacks” previously. You will not be ableto unlatch the seat from the floor unlessthe seatback is folded down.

4. Unlatch the seat fromthe floor by lifting thelever located nextto the carrying handleon the rear of theseat near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.

6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place.

7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure itis locked.

Put the seat in this position only when necessaryfor additional cargo space.

34

Returning the Third Row Seat from aTumbled PositionTo return the seat to the normal seating position,do the following:


2. Make sure there is nothing that could becometrapped under the seat.

3. Release the seat from the tumbled position bylifting the lever located next to the carryinghandle at the bottom rear of the seat.



{CAUTION:



35

Removing the Third Row SeatTo remove the seat, do the following:


2. Fold the seatback forward using theinstructions listed under “Folding theSeatbacks” previously. The seat cannot beremoved unless the seatback is folded.

3. Unlatch the seatfrom the floor bypulling the carryinghandle, locatedat the rear ofthe seat, rearward.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is atrack in the floor to guide the seat wheelsout of the vehicle.

Installing the Third Row SeatTo install the seat, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of thevehicle.

2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into thetrack on the floor and roll the seat forward.The front latches should lock into place. If thelatches do not lock, try tilting the rear ofthe seat upward slightly.

3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down onthe seat to engage the rear floor latches.

{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into placeproperly can move around in a collision orsudden stop. People in the vehicle couldbe injured. Be sure to lock the seat intoplace properly when installing it.

36

4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place. The seatback cannot beraised to the upright position unless the seat issecured to the floor.


{CAUTION:



{CAUTION:


7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to theoriginal position over the seatbacks.

37

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 228 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 228.

38

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

39

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

40

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

41

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle andget out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will bein most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Everyairbag system ever offered for sale hasrequired the use of safety belts. Even if youare in a vehicle that has airbags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

42

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 61 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 64. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

43

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 60.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 50.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.

44

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of theretractor.

45

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

46


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

47


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at alltimes.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

48


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

49

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,squeeze the buttons (A)on the sides of theheight adjusterand move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After you move the adjuster to where you wantit, try to move it down without squeezing thebuttons to make sure it has locked into position.

50

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 43.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

51

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someonecan sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way asthe lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isnot long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 60.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

52

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

53

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 60.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

54

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

55

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

56

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the second row seat and the third row,if your vehicle has one. Here is how to install acomfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. For the second row, remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

If your vehicle has a third row, remove theguide from its storage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

Second Row

Third Row

57

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

58

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 53. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guides. Slide the guide into itsstorage pocket.

59

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal, near frontal, rearor side crash, or a rollover.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 109.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

60

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seatthat has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

61

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outsideposition, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. If the child is sitting in thesecond row center position, move the childtoward the safety belt buckle. In eithercase, be sure that the shoulder belt still is onthe child’s shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide. See Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 56. If the child isso small that the shoulder belt is still very closeto the child’s face or neck, you might wantto place the child in a rear seat that has a lapbelt, if your vehicle has one.

62

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

63

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

64

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

65

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

66

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint, state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

67

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

68

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

69

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

70

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safetybelt or LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 74 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

71

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the placeof hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulderstraps that are attached to a flat pad whichrests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attachedto a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure the childis properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

72

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

CAUTION: (Continued)


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

73

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be attachedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

74

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

75

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.




Second Row — 60/40

Second Row — Bucket

Third Row — TwoPassenger

Third Row — ThreePassenger

76

For models with a three passenger third row seat,see the information following for installing achild restraint with a top tether in the third row,if your vehicle has one. Never install two toptethers using the same top tether anchor.

For models with 60/40 second row seating, therear right side passenger and center seatingpositions have exposed metal anchors located inthe crease between the seatback and the seatcushion.

For models with second row bucket seats, bothrear seating positions have exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

For models with bucket second row seating, thetop tether anchors are located at the bottom rear ofthe seat cushion for each seating position in thesecond row. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

77

For models with 60/40 second row seating, the toptether anchors are located at the bottom rear ofthe seat cushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat,there is one top tether anchor located at thebottom rear of the seat cushion that can be usedfor the rear driver side seating position in thethird row. Never install two top tethers using thesame top tether anchor.

For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat,there is one top tether anchor located at thebottom rear of the seat cushion that can be usedfor either the third row center or driver sideseating position. Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Second Row Seat — 60/40 Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger

78

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger position or the third row passenger sideseating position if your vehicle has a third rowseat, if a national or local law requires that the toptether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be attached. There is no place to attachthe top tether in these positions.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

79

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

80

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured, may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if the vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using asingle tether, routethe tether overthe seatback.

81

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead rest/restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether around thehead rest/restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead rest/restraintand you are using asingle tether, raise thehead rest/restraintand route the tetherunder the headrest/restraint and inbetween the headrest/restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

82

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 74.

If your vehicle has a third row, there is notop tether anchor in the passenger-side seatingposition. Do not secure a child restraint inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that thetop tether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

83

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

84

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 74.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killed bythe right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in this position. Therestraints will not work properly.

85

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 72.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 101 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 230for more information on this including importantsafety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:



86

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seatson page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 74.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 101. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Power Seatson page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator should light and staylit when you turn the ignition to RUN orSTART. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 230.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

87

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

88

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be litand stay lit when the key is turned to RUNor START.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

89

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle also has roof-mounted rolloverairbags designed for either side impact or rolloverdeployment. Roof-mounted rollover airbags areavailable for the driver and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver and for the right frontpassenger and the passenger seated directlybehind that passenger.

For roof-mounted rollover airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theceiling above the sidewall trim near the driver’sand right front passenger’s window and thesecond row outside seating positions.

Also, if your vehicle has a third row passengerseat, your vehicle will have third row roof-mountedrollover airbags.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of an inflatingfrontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job and comply with federalregulations.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes.


90


They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted rollover airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle, during a vehicle rollover,or in a severe frontal impact. They are notdesigned to inflate in rear crashes. If yourvehicle has roof-mounted airbags, theyare designed to provide both side impactprotection and rollover protection.Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted rolloverairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door in the first or second rowseats, or the rear windows in the third rowseat, if your vehicle has roof-mountedrollover airbags.

91

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 61 or Infants and Young Children onpage 64.

Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door in the first or second rowseats, or the rear windows in the third rowseat, if your vehicle has roof-mountedrollover airbags.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 229 for more information.

92

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

93

The roof-mounted rollover airbag for the driver andthe person seated directly behind the driver islocated in the ceiling above the side windows.

The roof-mounted rollover airbag for the right frontpassenger and the person directly behind thatpassenger is located in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

94

If your vehicle has a third row seat, theroof-mounted rollover airbag is located in theceiling above the rear windows for the outsidepassenger positions.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted rollover airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

95

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.

96

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole)the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an anglethe airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

Your vehicle has a seat position sensor whichenables the sensing system to monitor thefore and aft position of the driver’s seat. Seatposition sensors provide information that is usedto determine if the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

Your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbagsand a rollover sensor. See Airbag System onpage 90. These “rollover capable” airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes, during a rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. A roof-mounted rollover airbag will inflate ifthe crash severity is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Roof-mounted rolloverairbags are not intended to inflate in rearimpacts. Both roof-mounted rollover airbags willdeploy when either side of the vehicle is struck orduring a rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.

97

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact or a rollover event.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 359 for tips onoff-road driving.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. In the case of a roof-mounted rolloverairbag, the sensing system detects that thevehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severefrontal impact. The sensing system triggers arelease of gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modulesare located in the ceiling of the vehicle, nearthe side windows.

If your vehicle has a third row seat withroof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modulesare located inside the rear-most pillar trim andabove in the ceiling above the fixed rear glass.

98

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.The airbag supplements the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.

Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not helpyou in many types of collisions, including manyfrontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward the airbag. Airbags should never beregarded as anything more than a supplementto safety belts, and then only in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal collisions for thedriver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags,and only in moderate to severe side collisionsfor roof-mounted rollover airbags.

99

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbagsare designed to deflate more slowly and maystill be at least partially inflated minutes after thevehicle comes to rest. Some components ofthe airbag module — the steering wheel hub forthe driver’s airbag, the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, and the areaalong the ceiling of the vehicle near the sidewindows for vehicles with roof–mounted sideimpact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There will be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust inthe air. This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to do so. Ifyou have breathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seek medicalattention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors and turn the interior lamps onwhen the airbags inflate. You can lock thedoors again and turn the interior lamps off byusing the controls for those features.

100

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for your airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 582.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag systems. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theoverhead console will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START. The wordsON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, willbe visible during the system check. Whenthe system check is complete, either the wordON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or thesymbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 230.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

United States Canada

101

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


{CAUTION:




102


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied

• the system determines that an infant is presentin a rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint

• the system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s airbag, the off indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 86.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

103

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sairbag anytime the system senses that a personof adult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to be enabled, theon indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in the

seat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

104

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 229 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 107 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

105

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You do notwant the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 589.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the airbag system. Besure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

106

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 570.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, rollover sensormodule, instrument panel, steering wheel,ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted rollover airbag modules, orairbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 570.

107

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 530 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the side impact airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows, the airbag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s airbag, orside impact airbag module and ceiling coveringfor roof-mounted rollover airbags. Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

108

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

109

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 229.

110

Keys ............................................................ 113Remote Keyless Entry System .................. 114Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ... 116

Doors and Locks ........................................ 122Door Locks ................................................ 122Power Door Locks ..................................... 123Delayed Locking ........................................ 123Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 124Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 124Lockout Protection ..................................... 125Liftgate/Liftglass ......................................... 126Power Liftgate ........................................... 128Power Running Boards .............................. 132

Windows ...................................................... 132Power Windows ........................................ 133Sun Visors ................................................ 134

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 134Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 135PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 136PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 137

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 139New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 139Ignition Positions ....................................... 140Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 141Starting the Engine .................................... 141Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 143Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 144Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 145Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 150Parking Brake ........................................... 152Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 153Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 154Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 155Engine Exhaust ......................................... 156Running the Engine While Parked ............. 157

Mirrors ......................................................... 158Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................... 158

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 161

Section 2 Features and Controls

111

OnStar ® System .......................................... 164Universal Home Remote System ................ 166

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 166

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 167

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 168

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triagular LED) ....... 174

Storage Areas ............................................. 178Glove Box ................................................. 178Cupholder(s) .............................................. 178Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 178Center Console Storage Area .................... 179Luggage Carrier ........................................ 179Rear Storage Area .................................... 180Convenience Net ....................................... 180Cargo Cover ............................................. 181Cargo Management System ...................... 182

Sunroof ....................................................... 185

Section 2 Features and Controls

112

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. Donot leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

113

Your vehicle has onedouble-sided key for theignition, all doorlocks, tailgate and sidestorage boxes.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be ableto assist you with obtaining replacements.

In an emergency contact roadside assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 575.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

114

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or if youhave to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 116.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

115

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlockedfrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature youcan also start your vehicle with the RKEtransmitter. The RKE transmitter, with the remotestart button, provides an increased operatingrange of 195 feet (60 m) away. However,the operating range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off than you wereto start it.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry System on page 114.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailedinformation.

With Remote Start andLiftglass (Without

Remote Start Similar)

With Remote Start andPower Liftgate andLiftglass (Without

Remote Start Similar)

116

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds of the previouspress of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262 foradditional information. Pressing the lock buttonmay arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlockthe driver’s door. If the button is pressedagain within five seconds, all remaining doors willunlock. The interior lamps will come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turnedon. If enabled through the DIC, the parkinglamps will flash once to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 262. Pressing theunlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarmthe content theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 135.

m (Liftglass): Press and hold this button onthe RKE transmitter to open the liftglass.

& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this buttonon the RKE transmitter to open and close theliftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime willsound to indicate when the liftgate is opening andclosing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarmwill turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

117

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your GM dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter. Onceyour dealer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehiclecan have a maximum of eight transmitters matchedto it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DICOperation and Displays (Using DIC Buttons) onpage 245 or DIC Operation and Displays (UsingTrip Odometer Reset Stem) on page 250 forinstructions on how to match RKE transmitters toyour vehicle.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 252 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

118

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and separate the bottom half fromthe top half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle. It may also start up thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems andrear window defogger. Normal operation of thesystem will return after the key is turned to theRUN position.

If your vehicle has an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will default to a heating mode during colderoutside temperatures and a cooling mode duringwarmer outside temperatures. If your vehicledoes not have an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start the climate controlsystem will turn on at the setting the vehicle wasset to when the vehicle was last turned off.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation. However,the range may be less while the vehicle is running.As a result, you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry System on page 114 for additionalinformation.

119

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold the remotestart button to start the vehicle.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash. If you can not seethe vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remotestart button for at least four seconds. Thevehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remotestart button again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.Remote start can be extended one time.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,and the engine is still running, turn the key tothe RUN position to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separatetimes between driving sequences. The engine willrun for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again afterthe vehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to runfor 15 minutes.

The additional ten minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

120

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension has been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the keyis in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if thereis an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system maybe enabled or disabled through the DIC.See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262for additional information.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your RKE transmitter will have extended rangethat will allow you to lock or unlock your vehiclefrom approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

121

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall outof a moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

122

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use the remote keylessentry (RKE) transmitter or the key in thedriver’s door.

From the inside, use the power door locks ormanual door locks. To lock or unlock the door withthe manual locks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switchor the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitterand a door or the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last door is closed. Youwill hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature and immediately lock allthe doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is in theignition.

You can program this feature using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DELAY DOORLOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 262.

123

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock featurewhich enables you to program the vehicle’spower door locks. You can program this featurethrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 262 for more information on DICprogramming.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label depictinglock and unlockpositions is locatednear the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

Security Lock Labelshown

124

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking the key inthe vehicle when the key is in the ignition anda front door is open.

If the driver’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the driver’s door is open and thekey is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver’s door will unlock.

If the passenger’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the front passenger’s door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors willlock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.

125

Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftglass or liftgate open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If you must drive with the liftglass orliftgate open, or if electrical wiring orother cable connections must passthrough the seal between the body andthe liftglass or liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 214.



• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle is equipped with apower liftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust on page 156.

See Power Liftgate on page 128 for moreinformation on how to use the power liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or press the door unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice.See Remote Keyless Entry System Operationon page 116.

126

To open the liftglass, press the button on theunderside of the license pocket applique (A).The liftglass can also be opened by pressing theliftglass release button on the RKE.

To open the entire liftgate, press the power liftgaterelease button on the RKE or in the vehicle.See Power Liftgate on page 128. You can alsopress the touchpad on the underside of the liftgatehandle (B). The liftgate will open after a slightdelay. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to openthe liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup orpull strap as an aid.

The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if therear wipers are in motion. Attempting to open theliftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are inmotion will cause the release of the liftglassor liftgate to delay until the wipers are parked offthe liftglass.

Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electriclatch. If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open.The liftglass and liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass stillwill not function, your vehicle should be taken to adealership for service.

127

Power LiftgateYour vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehiclemust be in PARK (P) to power open or close theliftgate.

The liftgate must be completely closed to poweropen or completely open to power close.

The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound atthe beginning of each power operation cycle.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the power liftgate. Make surethere is no one in the way of the liftgateas it is closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could break the liftgateglass. Always check to make sure the areaabove the liftgate is clear before opening it.

To open and close the liftgate, press and hold thepower liftgate button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. Press the RKE button a second time duringliftgate operation to reverse that operation. SeeRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 116 for more information.

The liftgate can also beopened and closed bypressing the powerliftgate button onthe overhead console.Press the button asecond time duringliftgate operationto reverse thatoperation.

The liftgate can be power opened by pressing thetouchpad switch on the liftgate handle. Pressthe button a second time during liftgate operationto reverse that operation.

Power Liftgate Buttonon Overhead Console

128

The liftgate can be power closed by pressing thepower liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.Press the button a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate my be temporarily disabledunder extreme high or low temperatures. Ifthis occurs, the liftgate can still be operatedmanually. The power liftgate may not operateunder low battery conditions.

If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) whilethe power function is in progress, the liftgatepower function will continue to completion. If youshift the transmission out of PARK (P) andaccelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,the liftgate may reverse to the open position.Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

If you power open the liftgate and the liftgatesupport struts have lost pressure, the lights willflash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will holdopen temporarily, then slowly close. See yourdealer for service before using the liftgate.

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch

129

Obstacle Detection FeaturesIf the liftgate encounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle, a warning chime willsound and the liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or open position.After removing the obstruction, the liftgate may bepower opened or closed normally. If the liftgateencounters multiple obstacles on the same powercycle, the power function will deactivate, andthe liftgate will switch to manual operation. TheREAR ACCESS OPEN warning message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicatethat the liftgate is open. After removing theobstructions, manually open the liftgate to the fullopen position or close the liftgate to the fullyclosed and latched position. The liftgate will nowresume normal power operation.

Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on theside edges of the liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the vehicle body andpresses against this sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again or closed manually.

Manual Operation of Power Liftgate

To change the liftgateto manual operation,toggle the switch on theoverhead console tothe “Disable” positionindicated by a circle.

With the power liftgate disabled and the doorunlocked, the power liftgate can be manuallyopened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on thehandle on the outside of the liftgate, and liftthe gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pullcup or pull strap to lower the liftgate and close.The liftgate latch will power cinch to closedposition. Always close the liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power close button onthe liftgate is pressed while power operationis disabled, the lights will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

130

When driving with the liftgate open, the powerliftgate should be switched to manual liftgateoperation — the overhead console switch set tothe “Disable” position.

Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electriclatch. If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open.The liftglass and liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass stillwill not function, your vehicle should be taken to adealership for service.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftglass or liftgate open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness and evendeath.



If you must drive with the liftglass orliftgate open, or if electrical wiring orother cable connections must passthrough the seal between the body andthe liftglass or liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 214.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle is equipped with apower liftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust on page 156.

Do not drive with the liftgate open if at all possible.

131

Power Running BoardsYour vehicle may have power running boards.These make getting into and out of the vehicleeasier.

The power running boards activate when eitherdoor on the driver’s or passenger’s side is openedor closed. They automatically extend frombeneath the vehicle on the side in which the doorhas been opened. Once the door is closed, therunning boards will automatically move back underthe vehicle. The vehicle must be stationary forthe running boards to extend or retract.

The switch used todisable the powerrunning boards islocated on the centerconsole below theclimate control system.

The running boards cannot be disabled in theextended position.

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

132

Power Windows

The power windowcontrols are locatedon each of theside doors.

The driver’s door has a switch for the passengerand rear windows also. The power windowswork when the ignition has been turned toACCESSORY or RUN or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 141.

Press the switch to lower the window.

Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise thewindow.

Driver’s Side shown

133

Express-Down WindowsThe driver and front passenger windows have anexpress-down feature that allows the windows to belowered without holding the switch. Press downfully on the window switch, then release, to activatethe express-down mode. The express-down modecan be canceled at any time by pulling up on theswitch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The window lockoutswitch is located with the power window switcheson the driver’s door armrest. This featureprevents the rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driver’s position. Pressthe switch to turn on the lockout feature. Anindicator light will come on to show the lockoutfeature is on. To turn the feature off, pressthe switch again and the indicator light will go off.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach thesun visor from the center mount and slide italong the rod from side-to-side to cover the driveror passenger side of the front window. Swingthe sun visor to the side to cover the side window.It can be moved along the rod from side-to-sidein this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors onboth the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pullthe sun visor down and lift the mirror cover toturn the lamps on.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

134

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

This is the security light.

To activate the theft-deterrent system, do thefollowing:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry(RKE) transmitter. The security light shouldcome on and stay on.

3. Close all doors. The security light should gooff after about 30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security light goes off.

If a locked door is opened without using the RKEtransmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur.The horn will chirp and the lights will flash.

If the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitterduring the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm willgo off. The headlamps and parking lamps will flashfor two minutes, and the horn will sound for30 seconds, then will turn off to save the batterypower. You can choose different feedback optionsfor the alarm. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 244 Driver Information Center (DIC).

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key, themanual door lock, or the power door lock switch.It activates only if you use the RKE transmitter.You should also remember that you can start yourvehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarmhas been set off.

135

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with thedoor key after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set offthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off thealarm by pressing the unlock button on theRKE transmitter. The alarm will not stop if you tryto unlock a door any other way.

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

While the alarm is set, the power door unlockswitch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 538.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps donot flash, the vehicle should be serviced byyour dealer.

PASS-Key ® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

136





PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

PASS-Key ® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto RUN, ACCESSORY or START from theOFF position.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to checkthe fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 538. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.

137

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a newor replacement key. Up to nine additional keysmay be programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keysonly. If all the currently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+to have keys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmedand turn it to the RUN position withinfive seconds of removing the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

138

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)

or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime your new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 400 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

139

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch tofour different positions.

A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition andtransmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You willonly be able to remove the key when the ignitionis turned to LOCK.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is all the way in. If it is, turn the steeringwheel left and right while you turn the keyhard. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off.

Notice: Lengthy operation of features such asthe radio in the accessory ignition positionand the RUN position may drain the battery andprevent your vehicle from starting. Do notoperate your vehicle in the accessory ignitionposition for a long period of time.

C (RUN): This is the position for driving. It is theposition the switch returns to after the enginestarts, and you release the key.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

140

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,achime will sound, when you open the driver’s door.Always remember to remove your key from theignition and take it with you. This will lock yourignition and transaxle. Also, always remember tolock the doors.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power(RAP) feature which will allow certain features onyour vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutesafter the ignition key is turned to LOCK.

The radio, power windows, and if the vehicle hasa sunroof and the OnStar® System, will workwhen the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK,these features will continue to work for up to10 minutes or until a door is opened.

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in anyother position — that is a safety feature. Torestart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnthe ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmissiongently until the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem.

141

If the ignition key is turned to the START, andthen released when the engine begins cranking,the engine will continue cranking until thevehicle starts or until it exceeds the maximumcranking time allowed, approximately15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. The engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or LOCK.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor and drain the battery. Waiting about15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down, will preventdamage due to overheating.

2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds,push the accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor, while you hold the ignition key inSTART. When the engine starts, let go of thekey and let up on the accelerator pedal.Wait about 15 seconds between each try.

When starting your engine in very cold weather(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnthe ignition key to START and hold it there upto 15 seconds. When the engine starts, letgo of the key.

2. If your engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for aboutthree seconds. When the engine starts, letgo of the key and accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

142

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.

This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move toward the driverfor better pedal reach.

The switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on the centerconsole below theclimate control system.

Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch tomove the pedals closer to your body. Pressthe arrow at the top of the switch to move thepedals away from your body.

No adjustment to the pedals can be made whenthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while usingthe cruise control.

Your vehicle has a memory function which allowspedal settings to be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 12 formore information.

143

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, nearthe power steering fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

144

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission OperationYour vehicle has an Hydra-Matic® 6L80automatic transmission, and has an electronicshift position indicator within the instrument panelcluster. The electronic shift position indicatordisplays when the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P).

There are several different positions for theshift lever.

See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” later in thissection.

145

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

When parked on a hill, especially when thevehicle has a heavy load, you may notice anincrease in the effort to shift out of Park.See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) underShifting Into Park (P) on page 153 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 153. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 400.

146

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

147

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Drive (D) can be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills,or for off-road driving. You may want to shift thetransmission to a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 357.

When temperatures are very cold, theHydra-Matic® Automatic Transmission’s gearshifting may be delayed providing more stableshifts until the engine warms up. Shifts maybe more noticeable with a cold transmission.This difference in shifting is normal.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position lets driversselect the range of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If your vehicle has this feature,see “Driver Shift Control” later in this section.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, usethe brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature thatadjusts the transmission shifting to the currentdriving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshiftsand downshifts. This shift stabilization feature isdesigned to determine, before making an upshift,if the engine will be able to maintain vehiclespeed by analyzing things such as throttle position,vehicle load, and hill grade. If the shift stabilizationfeature determines that a current vehicle speedcannot be maintained, the transmission doesnot upshift and instead holds the current gear.In some cases, this may appear to be a delayedshift, however the transmission is operatingnormally.

148

Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. Adaptive shift controls continuallycompares key shift parameters to pre programmedideal shift conditions stored in the transmissionscomputer. The transmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicle performanceaccording to the way the vehicle is being used,such as with a heavy load. During this adaptiveshift controls process, some shifts may feeldifferent as the transmission determines the bestsettings for a particular shift.

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Your vehicle has a Driver Shift Control (DSC).The DSC controls the vehicle’s transmission.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to the MANUALMODE (M).

2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift ordownshift selecting the desired range ofgears for your current driving conditions.

149

When in the MANUAL MODE (M) a number willdisplay next to the M, indicating the current gearthat has been selected. The number displayed inthe gear indicator is the highest gear that can beused. However, your vehicle can automatically shiftto lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions.This means that all gears below that number areavailable. When FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1)through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically shiftedby the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used untilthe plus/minus button located on the steeringcolumn lever is used to change to the gear.The DSC controls the vehicle and engine speedwhile driving down a hill or towing a trailer, byallowing you to select a desired range of gears.The transmission will prevent a gear range until aspeed that is appropriate for current drivingconditions is achieved. If shifting is prevented forany reason, the currently selected gear willflash multiple times in the instrument panel cluster.Grade Braking is not available when the DriverShift Control is active. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 150 for more information.While using the DSC, Cruise Control and theTow/Haul mode can be used.

Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haulmode adjusts the transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, and transmissioncooling when towing or hauling heavy loads.

150

Press the button located on the end of the shiftlever to turn the tow/haul on or off. When thetow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panelcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 242 for moreinformation.

Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Traileron page 400 for more information.

The tow/haul mode works with the Autoride®

feature, if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ridewhen trailering or with a loaded vehicle. SeeAutoride® on page 399.

Grade BrakingGrade Braking assists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed byautomatically implementing a shift schedule thatuses the engine and the transmission to slowthe vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakessystem and increases control of the vehicle. Thesystem constantly monitors the vehicle’s speed,acceleration, throttle position, and whetherthe brake pedal is being pressed, and determineswhen to keep the current vehicle speed or toslow down. The system will then automaticallycommand downshifts that reduces the vehiclesspeed, until the brake pedal is no longerbeing pressed. This indicates the desired vehiclespeed has been reached.

The tow/haul mode and grade braking shiftmodes can be activated by pressing the button onthe end of the shift control stalk. While in theDSC mode, grade braking is deactivated, allowingthe driver to select a gear.

See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 145 for more information.

151

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot. Push downthe parking brake pedal with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the warning light willflash when the parking brake is applied andthe vehicle is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) forat least three seconds.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down.

Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located abovethe parking brake pedal, with the parkingbrake symbol, to release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 400.

152

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 400.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

153

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) on page 153.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will be able topull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK.You have to fully apply your regular brakes beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operationon page 145.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway up into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then, move the shift lever intothe desired gear.

154

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

155

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

156

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever have to, here are some thingsto know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 156.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 386.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 153.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 400.

157

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®, Compass andTemperature DisplayWhen on, an automatic dimming mirrorautomatically dims to the proper level to minimizeglare from lights behind you after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassreading and the outside temperature will bothappear in the display at the same time.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibratethe compass. For more information on calibration,see below.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until either aflashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity,the new unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, please consult yourdealer. Under certain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.

158

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, located tothe left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, pressand hold the on/off button for approximatelysix seconds until the green light comes on,indicating that the mirror is in automaticdimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button forapproximately six seconds, until the greenindicator light turns off.

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjust for compass variance.

Compass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, yourcompass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

159

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appear in the display. Thecompass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.Release the button. After approximatelyfour seconds of inactivity, the new zonenumber will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described below.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (N forNorth, for example), there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.

160

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

The outside powerfoldaway mirror controlsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (A) again to deselect the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s sidemirror. Then press the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to adjust the mirror.Press (B) again to deselect the mirror.

• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the drivingposition.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

161

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

Automatic DimmingThe driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glareof the headlamps behind you. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display on page 158.

Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has the memory package, theoutside mirrors are able to perform the curb viewassist mirror function. This feature may beuseful in allowing the driver to view the curb whenparallel parking. This feature will cause thepassenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to apreselected position when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R).

The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will returnto its original position when the vehicle isshifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition isturned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 244.

162

Heated MirrorsThe button to turn the heated mirrors on or off islocated on the climate control panel. Pressthis button to warm the driver’s and passenger’soutside rearview mirrors to help clear them ofice, snow, and condensation.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 214for more information.

Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so morecan be seen from the driver’s seat.

Your vehicle has a turn signal indicator on themirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash inthe direction of the turn or lane change.

163

OnStar ® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency where we can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theTerms and Conditions of the OnStar® SubscriptionService Agreement are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber Information packet locatedin your vehicle. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar ® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan is included for one year from thedate of purchase. You can extend this plan beyondthe first year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections Plan to meet your needs. For moreinformation, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor.

164

Safe & Sound Plan• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification

• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Directions & Connections ® Plan• All Safe & Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar ® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®

subscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands at the touch of a button. Hands-FreeCalling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and maybe used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages orlinked to a cell phone through OnStar® SharedMinutes Plan. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owner’s Guide, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®

advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorYour vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is afeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that usesyour minutes to access weather, local trafficreports and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’sguide for more information.

165

OnStar ® Steering Wheel Controls

Your vehicle is equippedwith a Talk/Mute buttonthat can be used tointeract with OnStar®.

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 335for more information.

When calling into voice mail systems or to dialdirectory numbers, press this button once, wait forthe response, say the number(s) to be dialed,wait for the number(s) to be repeated and thensay “dial.”

See the OnStar® Owner’s guide for moreinformation.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




166

The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.

167




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LEDabove the Universal Home Remote Systembuttons, follow the instructions below. If there isone triangular LED above the Universal HomeRemote System buttons, follow the instructionsunder Universal Home Remote System Operation(with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

168

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of thesteps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door openeris a fixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif a panel of DIP switches is present. If not,your garage door opener is a rolling code device.

169

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Make sure that your key is in theACCESSORY position and the engine is offwhile programming the transmitter.

2. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

3. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

4. Input these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

Example of Switch Settings

170

5. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

6. After programming the switch settings, pressand release all three buttons at the sametime. The indicator lights will turn on.

7. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 55 seconds.

8. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

9. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

171

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Make sure that your key is in theACCESSORY position and the engine is offwhile programming the transmitter.

2. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

3. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

172

4. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 20 seconds.

5. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

6. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 574.

173

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LEDabove the Universal Home Remote buttons, followthe instructions below. If your vehicle hasthree round LED above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation(with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have thestop and reverse feature. This includes any garagedoor opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. If you have a newer garage door openerwith rolling codes, please be sure to followSteps 6 through 8 to complete the programming ofyour Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter foruse in other vehicles as well as for futureUniversal Home Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 574.

Be sure that people and objects are clearof the garage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

174

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for twoseconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.

175

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequence asecond time, and depending on the brand ofthe garage door opener or other rollingcode device, repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

176

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed withStep 2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 574.

177

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling the bottom of thehandle upward. Use key to lock.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have cupholders located in thefront and rear of the floor console or in thefold down armrest. You may also have cupholdersin the second and third row seat armrest areas.

To use the front cupholder, press down onthe access door latch button and release. Thedoor will open. To close, push it back down.The front cupholder liner can be removed forcleaning by squeezing the top center of itand pulling it out from under the chrome ring.

To access the cupholders in the rear floor console,pull downward on the lid.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a closed storage area onthe instrument panel above the compact discchanger. You can open the storage area bypressing in the bottom of the lid and the lid willautomatically raise up. Press down on thelid to close the storage area.

178

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a console compartment betweenthe bucket seats.

To open it, press the button on the front of theconsole and swing the console cover open.

The console may be equipped with an accessorypower outlet inside. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 213.

The rear of the console also has a cupholderthat swings down for the rear seat passengersto use.

Luggage CarrierYou can load things on top of your vehicle withthis feature.

The luggage carrier has slats and siderailsattached to the roof and crossrails which can bemoved back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie theload to the siderails or siderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests on the slats as far forward aspossible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity whenloading your vehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 392.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’releaving, check now and then to make surethe luggage and cargo are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof,place the load in the area over the rearwheels (behind the rear side door onYukon XL Denali models). If you need to, cuta piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit insidethe crossrails and siderails to spread the load.If plywood is used, tie it to the siderailsupports.

179

• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderailsupports. Use the crossrails only to keepthe load from sliding. To move the crossrails,pull out on the latch release handle ateach end. Slide the crossrail to the desiredposition balancing the force side to side. Pushthe release handle back into the latchedposition and slide the crossrail back and forthslightly to be sure the latch snaps securelyinto place.

• If you need to carry long items, move thecrossrails as far apart as they will go. Tiethe load to the crossrails and the siderails orsiderail supports. Also tie the load to thebumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that thecrossrails or siderails are damaged.

• For the purpose of wind noise reduction,locate the front crossrail approximately18 to 24 inches (46 to 58 cm) rearward of thefront supports.

• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securelylocked into the siderail.

Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) located above the rear glass. If items areloaded on the roof of the vehicle, care should betaken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.

Rear Storage AreaYour vehicle may have a storage compartmentlocated in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in thedriver’s side trim panel.

To open the utility compartment, turn the knobsand swing the compartment door open. Thecompartment door can be removed.

Convenience NetThe convenience net (if equipped) in the rear ofyour vehicle helps to keep small loads in placeduring sharp turns or quick stops and starts.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.

To install the net, attach the hooks to theraised cargo tie downs. Then, attach the cordloops to the button retainers in the side trim.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat whenyou’re not using it.

180

Cargo Cover

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover couldbe thrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver. You orothers could be injured. If you remove thecover, always store it in the properstorage location. When you put it back,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

If you have a cargo cover, you can use it to coveritems in the cargo area of your vehicle.

To use the cover, do the following:

1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of thevehicle.

2. Latch the cover posts into the retainingsockets on the cargo area trim panels.

To return the cover to the retracted position, dothe following:

1. Pull up on the cover handle to release thecover posts from the retaining sockets.

2. Let the cover move forward to the full retractedposition.

To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbasemodel, do the following:

1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.

2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover endcap,push the cover endcap toward the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out ofthe vehicle.

To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:

1. Make sure the cover slot in the holderfaces rearward with the round surfacefacing down.

2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and placethe cover endcap into the slot in thepassenger’s side trim panel.

3. Move the other end of the cover forward andhold it next to the driver’s side trim panel slot.

181

4. Press the endcaps in, this will allow the coverto fit into the trim slot.

5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sureit is secure.On the extended wheelbase models there aretwo cover positions. The slots furthest forwardallow the cover to be used if the third seat isremoved or folded down. The cover can beinstalled and removed from either side.

Cargo Tie Downs

Your vehicle may beequipped with cargo tiedowns in the rearcargo area that allowyou to strap cargoin and keep it frommoving inside thevehicle.

When not using the tie downs, flip them down outof the way.

Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a cargomanagement system. It can be used for storingand separating cargo and as a table. Themaximum load is 200 lbs. (91 kg) distributed. It islocated in the rear of the vehicle on upper orlower horizontal guides. There are two verticalcurved guides that connect the upper andlower horizontal guides together. The system hasthree rollers on each side. The system will beequipped with either a release lever, located in themiddle handle, or a tab located on the side.These engage and disengage a locator pin. Theseare used in adjusting and positioning the system.

The cargo management system can be positionedon the upper or lower horizontal guides.

182

To adjust the system from the upper guide to thelower guide, do the following:

1. Squeeze and hold the release lever, or slidethe tab towards the inside of the vehicle, toretract the locator pin.

2. Pull the system back until the front rollersreach the vertical curved guides.

3. Lower the front rollers to the lower guides andpull the system back until the middle set ofrollers clear the upper guides.

4. Lower the system until the middle rollers arelined up with lower guides. While holding inthe release lever or tab, push the systemforward until all three sets of rollers are on theguides.

5. Release the lever or tab and push the systemuntil the locator pin reaches the locator hole.

To adjust the system from the lower guide to theupper guide, do the following:

1. Squeeze and hold the release lever, or slidethe tab towards the inside of the vehicle, toretract the locator pin.

2. Pull the system back until the middle rollerscan be raised and placed into the upperguides.

3. Push the system forward until the front rollersare lined up with the vertical curved guides.

4. Push down on the rear of the system andraise the front rollers up the vertical curvedguides.

183

5. Push the system forward until all three sets ofrollers are resting on the guides and releasethe lever or tab.

6. Push the system forward until the locator pinreaches the locator hole.

The cargo management system can be pulled outand used as a table on both the upper andlower guide. To use a table, squeeze the releaselever and pull the system towards you. Releasethe lever and pull the system until the locator pinreaches the next hole. The system will extendout of the vehicle. The liftgate can not be closed inthis position. Do not the operate the vehicle withliftgate open.

The cargo management system can be removedfrom the vehicle. This procedure should becompleted by two people. While squeezing therelease lever, pull the system back until the rollersclear the guides.

On one side of the system is a retractablestorage area.

To access, pull the handle in the center of thesystem up.

184

Slide the hinge covers to the center of each side.This will keep the sides of the storage systemstationary allowing it to stay upright. Insidethe system are two removable dividers. Toremove, unhook the loops at the ends of eachdivider. When not in use, slide the hinge coversback and the storage system will fold backdown. Press down on the storage cover to lock itinto place.

On the opposite side of the system are twocupholders.

SunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a powersliding sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, theignition needs to be turned to ON, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must be active.When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until afront door is opened. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 141 for more information.

There are two switchesin the overhead consolethat operate thesunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open thesunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’s sideswitch until the sunroof reaches the desiredposition.

185

To close the sunroof, press and hold the front ofthe driver’s side switch until the sunroof reachesthe desired position. The sunshade will openautomatically with the sunroof, but can also beopened manually.

When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-openthe sunroof, fully press and release the rear ofthe driver’s side switch. The sunroof will openautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. To express-closethe sunroof, fully press and release the front of thedriver’s side switch. The sunroof will closeautomatically. To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. The sunshade willopen automatically with the sunroof, but can alsobe opened manually.

When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector willautomatically raise. The air deflector will retractwhen the sunroof is closed.

Vent: From the closed position, press the rear ofthe passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.To stop the sunroof partway, press the switcha second time. To close the sunroof, press andhold the front of the passenger’s side switch.To stop the sunroof partway, release the switch.

Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in thepath of the sunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect the object and stopthe sunroof from closing at the point of theobstruction. The sunroof will then open halfway,and the air deflector will raise. To close the sunroofonce it has re-opened, refer to the “Express-Close”or “Manual-Close” functions described previously.If the sunroof is in the vent position, and thereis an object in the path of the sunroof whenit closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroofonce it has re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close”or “Express-Close” functions described previously.

186

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 190Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 192Other Warning Devices ............................. 192Horn .......................................................... 192Tilt Wheel .................................................. 193Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 193Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 194Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 195Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 195Windshield Wipers ..................................... 196Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 197Windshield Washer .................................... 198Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 199Cruise Control ........................................... 200Exterior Lamps .......................................... 203Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 205Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 205Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 205Fog Lamps ................................................ 206Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 207Dome Lamps ............................................. 207Dome Lamp Override ................................ 207Entry Lighting ............................................ 207Exit Lighting .............................................. 207

Front Reading Lamps ................................ 208Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 208Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 208Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 213Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 214

Climate Controls ......................................... 214Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 214Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 222Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System and Electronic ClimateControls ................................................. 223

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 225Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 226Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 227Trip Odometer ........................................... 227Tachometer ............................................... 227Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 228Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 228Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 229Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 230Charging System Light .............................. 232Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 232Brake System Warning Light ..................... 233

Section 3 Instrument Panel

187

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 234StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 235Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 236Tire Pressure Light .................................... 236Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 237Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 240Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 241Security Light ............................................ 241Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 242Cruise Control Light .................................. 242Highbeam On Light ................................... 242Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 242Fuel Gage ................................................. 243Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 244

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 244DIC Operation and Displays

(Using DIC Buttons) ............................... 245DIC Operation and Displays

(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem) ........ 250DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 252DIC Vehicle Customization

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 262

Audio System(s) ......................................... 272Setting the Time (Radio with a

Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 274Setting the Time (Radio with a

Single CD and DVD Player) ................... 275Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) ................... 276Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 294XM Radio Messages ................................. 319Navigation/Radio System ........................... 321Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 321Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 333Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 335Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 335Radio Reception ........................................ 336Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 338Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 338Rear Side Window Antenna ....................... 338XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 339

Section 3 Instrument Panel

188

✍ NOTES

189

Instrument Panel Overview

United States version shown; Canada Similar

190

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 222.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 193.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 226.

D. Gearshift Lever. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 145.

E. Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 150.

F. Driver Information Center Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 244.

G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 272.

H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps onpage 203.

I. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome LampOverride on page 207.

J. Cruise Control Buttons. See Audio SteeringWheel Controls on page 335.

K. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 193.L. Horn. See Horn on page 192.M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 335.N. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See Dual

Automatic Climate Control System onpage 214.

O. Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 213. Cigarette Lighter(If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and CigaretteLighter on page 214.

P. StabiliTrak® Button. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 349. Rear Park Aid Disable Button.See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 208.

Q. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 178.

191

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon top of the steeringcolumn.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can setthem up at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.

192

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel, that lets you adjustthe steering wheel before driving. Raising it tothe highest level gives more room to exit and enteryour vehicle.

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on thelower left side of the column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever. Then move the steering wheel to acomfortable position and release the lever to lockthe wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G (Turn and Lane Change Signals): SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 194.

53 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 195.

Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 195.

193

N (Windshield Wipers): See WindshieldWipers on page 196.

L ( Windshield Washer): See WindshieldWasher on page 198.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 199.

Z (Rear Wiper): See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 199.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 199.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever forless than one second until the arrow starts to flash.This will cause the turn signals to automaticallyflash three times. It will flash six times if tow-haulmode is active. Holding the turn signal lever formore than one second will cause the turn signalsto flash until you release the lever. The lever willreturn by itself when it is released.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb may be burned out and other drivers will notsee your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and ablown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 538.

194

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound ateach flash of the turn signal and the messageTURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC.To turn the chime and message off, move theturn signal lever to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53 (Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger): To change the headlamps from low tohigh beam, push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beam headlamps, pullthe multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicatorlight on the instrumentpanel cluster will alsobe on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass. It works even if your headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position oron low beam, your high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as long as you hold thelever toward you. The high-beam indicator onthe instrument panel cluster will come on. Releasethe lever to return to normal operation.

195

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen tothe windshield, gently loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades may not clear thewindshield well, making it harder to see anddrive safely. If the blades do become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts. For moreinformation, see Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 478.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload.

You control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start.Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.If you want more wipe cycles, hold the bandon mist longer.

(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wiping cycles. Thiscan be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn theband to choose the delay time. The closer tothe top of the lever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the bandto off.

196

Rainsense™ II WipersYour vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshieldwipers. These wipers automatically turn on whena sensor, mounted next to the inside rearviewmirror, detects moisture on the windshield. Whenactive, these wipers are able to detect moistureon the windshield and automatically turn onthe wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipersmust be set to one of the five delay settings. Eachof the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of therainsensor.

Since different drivers have different settingpreferences, it is recommended that the mid-rangesetting, position three, be used initially. For morewipes, select the higher settings; for fewer wipes,select the lower settings located closer to the offposition on the multifunction lever.

The rainsensor will automatically control thefrequency of the wipes from off to high speedaccording to the weather conditions. The wiperscan be left in a Rainsense™ mode even when itis not raining.

When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps willturn on automatically after approximately eightwipes. The headlamps will turn off if the wiperswitch is set to a delay position, and there havebeen no wipes for approximately three minutes, orif the wiper switch is turned to the off position. Ifit is dark outside, the headlamps will remain on.

Notice: Going through an automatic car washwith the wipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when going through anautomatic car wash.

197

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top of themultifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

Heated Windshield WasherIf your vehicle has the heated windshield washerfluid system it may be used to help clear ice,snow, tree sap, or bugs from your windshield.

The button is located inthe switchbank underthe climate controls.

Push the heated washer fluid button to activatethe heated windshield washer fluid system.The indicator light will flash. This activation willinitiate four heated wash/wipe cycles. Thefirst heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to40 seconds to occur, depending on outsidetemperature.

198

After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to20 seconds for each of the remaining cyclesto begin. Press the button again to turn off theheated windshield washer fluid system or itwill automatically turn off after four wipe cycleshave been completed.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam may flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to awiper position.

9 (Off): To turn the wiper off, slide the lever tothis setting.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): To turn on the rear wiperdelay, slide the lever to this setting.

Z (Rear Wiper): To turn on the rear wiper, slidethe lever to this setting.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rearwiper wash, push the button on the end of the turnsignal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluidon the rear window. The wipers will clear the rearwindow and either stop or return to your presetspeed. For more washer cycles, press andhold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer will not operate ifthe liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgateor liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on,the wiper will return to the parked positionand stop.

199

Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise control isturned off.

If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system andbegins to limit wheel spin while you are usingcruise control, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 349. When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, you may turn the cruisecontrol back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are locatedon left side of thesteering wheel.

200

T (On/Off): This button can both activate andturn off the system. The indicator light is onwhen cruise control is on and turns off when cruisecontrol is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set thespeed or make the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol without erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.

2. Get up to the desired speed you want.

3. Press the SET− button located on the steeringwheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

201

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous setspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the previous set cruise speed.

202

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Of course, applying the brake takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to be toomuch trouble and do not use cruise control onsteep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

• Press the On/Off button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located on theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

203

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic headlamps and daytimerunning lamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again will turn theautomatic headlamps or DRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off positionwill only work for vehicles that are shifted intothe PARK (P) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps


• Taillamps


; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:


• Taillamps


2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when theignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps


• Taillamps


204

Headlamps on ReminderA reminder chime will sound when the headlampsor parking lamps are manually turned on andyour ignition is off and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the light off then back on.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional DRL are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO

• The light sensor determines it is daytime

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps willbe on. The taillamps, sidemarker and otherlamps will not be on. The instrument panel backlighting will not be on either.

When it begins to get dark, the automaticheadlamp system will switch from DRL to theheadlamps.

When you turn the headlamp switch off, theheadlamps will go off.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system will turn on the headlamps at thenormal brightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio back lighting will also bedimly lit.

To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turnthe exterior lamps switch to the off position.Turning off the automatic headlamp system withthe headlamp switch is not available for vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the topof the instrument panel in the defroster grillethat regulates when the automatic headlamps turnon. Be sure it is not covered, or the system willcome on whenever the ignition is on.

205

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlampsystems so that driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does not affect the system.The DRL and automatic headlamp system will onlybe affected when the light sensor detects a changein lighting lasting longer than the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake approximately one minute for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it isbright enough outside. During that delay, yourinstrument panel cluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 207.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the control to the off position.

You may be able to turn off your AutomaticHeadlamp System. See Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) on page 205 for more information.

Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit thevehicle. You can program this feature using theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when needed.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the control is located on the exterior lampscontrol. The exterior lamps control is located onthe instrument panel to the left of the steeringcolumn.

Your ignition must be in the RUN position for thefog lamps to come on.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrumentpanel cluster to let you know that the fog lampsare on. Press the exterior lamps button againto turn the fog lamps off.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps also go off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

206

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This featurecontrols the brightness of the instrument panellights.

The knob for this feature is located next to theheadlamp control.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toadjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights.Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrumentpanel cluster or radio display to full brightnesswhen the headlamps or parking lamps are on.To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob to thefarthest clockwise position.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when a door is opened.

The dome lamps can also be turned on byturning the knob, located next to the exterior lampscontrol, clockwise to the farthest position. In thisposition, the dome lamps will remain on whether adoor is opened or closed.

Dome Lamp Override

E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the domeoverride button, located next to the exterior lampscontrol, to keep the dome lamps off when adoor is open. To set the lamps to the automaticoperation, press the button again so that it isextended. With the button in this position,the dome lamps will come on when a door isopened.

Entry LightingYour vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.

When the doors are opened, the dome lamps willcome on if the dome override button is in theextended position. If the dome override button ispressed in, the lamps will not come on.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen you remove the key from the ignition. Theywill turn off automatically in 20 seconds. The lightswill not come on if the dome override button ispressed in.

207

Front Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole.

To turn the reading lamps on or off, press thebutton located next to each lamp.

The lamps can be adjusted to a desired direction.

Your vehicle may also have reading lamps inother locations. To turn the lamps on or off, pressthe button located next to the lamp. The lampsare fixed and cannot be adjusted.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome, and readinglamps if they are left on for more than 10 minuteswhen the ignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA)The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system is designed to help you park while inReverse (R). It operates only at speeds less than5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps make parkingeasier and helps you avoid colliding with objectssuch as parked vehicles. The URPA systemdetects objects that are close to the rear of thevehicle which are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) offthe ground and below hood or trunk level. Thesystem detects objects up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behindyour vehicle. URPA determines how closethese objects are from your bumper within thisarea. Ultrasonic sensors on the rear bumper areused to detect the distance to the object.

208

{CAUTION:

Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assistsystem, the driver must check carefullybefore backing up. The system does notoperate above speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h).The system does not detect objects morethan 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle.This detection distance limit may bereduced during warm weather or highhumidity. Also, the system does notdetect objects that are below yourbumper, underneath your vehicle, or someobjects very close to the vehicle. Thesystem is not designed to detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.

So, unless you check carefully behindyour vehicle while you are backing up,they could be injured or killed.



Whether or not you are using rear parkassist, always check carefully behind yourvehicle before backing up and then watchclosely as you do.

The display is locatednear the passenger siderear window and canbe seen by looking overyour right shoulder.

The display has three color-coded lights. TheURPA lights are used to provide distance andsystem information, along with beeps that will beheard through the speakers.

209

URPA can be turned offby pressing the rearpark aid disable buttonlocated below theclimate controls. Theindicator light onthe button will be lit toindicate that URPAis off.

The red light in the URPA display will also be lit ifthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehiclehas a DIC, PARKING ASSIST OFF will display.URPA automatically turns back on each timethe vehicle is started.

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly come on to let youknow the display is operating correctly. URPAcomes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R). The system alsodoes not work at a reverse speed greater than5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red lighton the rear display will flash.

The system can be disabled using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Operation andDisplays (Using DIC Buttons) on page 245 orDIC Operation and Displays (Using Trip OdometerReset Stem) on page 250.

210

How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detectsobjects close to the rear bumper. The first time anobject is detected a single beep will sound. If anobject is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedbetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), thefollowing describes what will occur based on yourdistance to a detected object located behind thevehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), abeeping sound will repeat for a short time andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on andflashing.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARKINGASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and ared light will be shown on the rear URPAdisplay when the shift lever is moved intoREVERSE (R). This occurs under the followingconditions:

• The driver disables the system. See DICOperation and Displays (Using DIC Buttons)on page 245 or DIC Operation and Displays(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem) onpage 250.

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

211

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPAassumes the object is still attached, so you willhave to wait until the vehicle is driven forwardabove 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA willreturn to normal operation.

• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So,be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper freeof mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing Your Vehicle onpage 530. If the DIC still displays the PARKINGASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

• When URPA is disabled without driver actionand the driver attempts to turn URPA back onusing the Driver Information Center (DIC), thePARKING ASSIST ON option will not beselectable if the necessary conditions statedabove for normal system operation are not met.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

For Driver Information Center messages relatedto URPA, see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 252.

If the bumper is damaged, your URPA systemmay not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

212

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment, such as a cellular telephoneor CB radio.

Your vehicle has two accessory power outletsunder the climate controls; one inside the centerstorage console and one on the back of the floorconsole. There is also an accessory power outlet inthe rear cargo area on the passenger side.

To use a power outlet, lift the spring cap andinsert an electrical 12V device plug. The spring capwill close when the plug is removed.

Certain power accessory plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet andcould result in a blown adapter or vehicle fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information about the accessorypower plugs.

The accessory power outlets are powered, evenwhile the ignition is off. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is off may causethe vehicle’s battery to run down.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment. Do not use equipmentexceeding the maximum amperage rating of20 amperes.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

213

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterThe front ashtray is located near the center ofthe instrument panel or on the front console,if equipped. Pull on the ashtray door to open it.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way,and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back outby itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system, you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehiclealso has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

You can select different climate control settings forthe driver and passengers.

214

Driver’s Side Temperature ControlThe driver’s side temperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the air coming throughthe system on the driver’s side. The temperaturecan be adjusted even if the system is turnedoff. This is possible since outside air will alwaysflow through the system as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe cabin temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show the temperaturesetting decreasing or increasing.

Passenger’s Side Temperature ControlThe passenger’s temperature buttons can be usedto change the temperature of the air comingthrough the system on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. The temperature can be adjusted evenif the system is turned off. This is possiblesince outside air will always flow through thesystem as the vehicle is moving forward unless itis set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation”later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe cabin temperature. The passenger sidedisplay will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing.

The passenger’s temperature setting can beset to match the driver’s temperature setting bypressing the PASS button and turning off thePASS indicator. When the passenger’stemperature setting is set different than thedriver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS buttonwill illuminate and both the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature displays will beshown.

215

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operationis active the system will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display willchange to show the current temperature(s)and AUTO will be lit on the display. The currentdelivery mode and fan speed will also bedisplayed for approximately 5 seconds.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressor willrun when the outside temperature is over about40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set tooutside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet mayautomatically switch to recirculate inside air tohelp quickly cool down your vehicle. The lighton the button will illuminate in recirculation.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F(23°C) temperature setting and allow about20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use thedriver’s or passenger’s temperature buttons toadjust the temperature setting as necessary.If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F(15°C), the system will remain at the maximumcooling setting. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 90°F (32°C), the system will remain atthe maximum heat setting.Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicle toheat or cool any faster.

Be careful not to cover the solar sensor locatedon the top of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulates air temperaturebased on sun load and also turns on yourheadlamps. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem will delay turning on the fan until warm airis available. The length of delay depends onthe engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fanswitch will override this delay and change thefan to a selected speed.

216

O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off theclimate control system. Outside air will still enterthe vehicle, and will be directed to the floor.This direction can be changed by pressing themode button. Recirculation can be selected onceyou have selected vent or bi-level mode. Thetemperature can also be adjusted using eithertemperature button. If you adjust the air deliverymode or temperature settings with the systemoff, the display will illuminate briefly to show youthe settings and then return off. Press theon/off button or the up down arrows on the fanswitch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the airconditioning button to turn the system on whenit is off.

Manual OperationYou may manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

y9 z (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbolsallow you to manually adjust the fan speed.Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and thedown arrow to decrease fan speed.

Pressing one of these buttons when the systemis off will turn the system on. Pressing one of thesebuttons when in automatic control will place thefan under manual control. The fan setting willremain displayed and the AUTO light will turn off.The air delivery mode will remain underautomatic control.

yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and downbuttons to manually change the direction ofthe airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly press thebutton until the desired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing one of these buttons when thesystem is off will change air delivery mode withoutturning the system on. Pressing one of thesebuttons when in automatic control will place themode under manual control.

The air delivery mode setting will be displayed andthe AUTO light will turn off. The fan will remainunder automatic control.

217

H (Vent): This setting will deliver air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the airto the instrument panel outlets and to the flooroutlets. The flow can be divided between vent andfloor outlets depending upon where the knob isplaced between the settings. A little air is directedtowards the windshield and side window outlets.Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In this mode, the systemwill automatically select outside air.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” laterin this section.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light will come on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andprevent odors from entering your vehicle.Recirculation may also help cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly once the temperature insidethe vehicle is less than the outside temperature.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to selectrecirculation in one of those modes, the indicatorwill flash three times and turn off. The airconditioning compressor will also come on whenthis mode is activated. While in recirculation modethe windows may fog when the weather is cold anddamp. To clear the fog, select either the defog ordefrost mode and increase the fan speed.Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressingthe button again, or turning off the engine.

218

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning (A/C) compressor on andoff. When air conditioning is selected, an indicatorlight will come on to let you know that the airconditioning has been activated.

Pressing this button when the outside temperatureis too cool for air conditioning will make the airconditioning indicator flash three times andthen turn off to let you know the air conditioningmode is not available. If the air conditioningis on and the outside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for air conditioningto be effective, the air conditioning light will turn offto let you know the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This helps to reduce thetime it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. Thisis normal.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille inthe middle of the instrument panel, monitorsthe solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

219

The interior temperature sensors located in theheadliner above the driver side seat and inthe headliner above the second row seatsmeasure the temperature of the air inside yourvehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature and helps maintain thetemperature inside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could cause a false readingin the displayed temperature.

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfort settingby adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, andthe air delivery mode. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also be used as neededto maintain cool outlet temperatures.

220

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield.

Use the mode up and down arrows to select thedefog or defrost modes.

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When you select this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly. Thismode directs a portion of the air to the windshieldand side window vents and some to the floorvents. In this mode, the system will automaticallyforce outside air into your vehicle. Therecirculation mode cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is close to freezing. Donot drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

221

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn on the rear window defogger. It willautomatically turn off several minutes after ithas been activated. The defogger can also beturned off by pressing the button again or byturning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle untilall the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirror when therear window defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and onthe side of your instrument panel to directthe airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,

snow, or any other obstruction (such asleaves). The heater and defroster will workbetter, reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of your windows.

• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, setthe fan speed to maximum airflow for a fewmoments before driving. This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging the insideof your window.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout your vehicle.

222

• Adding outside equipment to the front of yourvehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, mayaffect the performance of the heating andair conditioning system. Check with yourdealer before adding equipment to the outsideof your vehicle.

Rear Air Conditioning and HeatingSystem and Electronic ClimateControlsIf your vehicle has this system, the rear heat andair conditioning controls are integrated with therear seat audio controls located in the centerconsole. The system can be controlled from thefront controls as well as the rear controls.

When the rear system is on, the front control headAUX button indicator will be illuminated. Pressingthe front control head AUX button the first timewill turn the rear system on in a mimic mode.In this mode, the airflow in the rear will beapproximately the same direction, temperature,and fan speed as the front. Pressing the AUXbutton again will turn the rear system andthe indicator off.

At anytime, if the rear controls are adjusted, thesystem will enter a rear independent mode. Airflowin the rear will then be directed according to thesettings of rear controls. At anytime the rear systemcan be turned off by pressing the front control headAUX button and turning the indicator off.

If the indicator in the front AUX button is off, therear system is off.

Rear Climate Controls with Rear Seat Audio Controls

223

Automatic Operation

AUTO: Press the mode button until this setting isselected to control the inside temperature, theair delivery, and the fan speed. AUTO will come onthe display when automatic operation is active.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Pressthe + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe cabin temperature. The rear controltemperature display will show the temperaturesetting decreasing or increasing.

The display will only indicate climate controlfunctions when the system is in rearindependent mode.

Manual Operation

z9 (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seataudio control panel allows you to manually adjustthe fan speed. To decrease airflow, press thebutton with the fan and down arrow symbol.Pressing the fan up button when the system is offwill turn the system on. The air delivery modewill remain under automatic control. To turnthe rear system off, keep pressing the button withthe fan and down arrow symbol.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Thesebuttons select the temperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area. Press the + button for warmerair and press the − button for cooler air.

N (Mode): Press the mode button to manuallychange the direction of the airflow in your vehicle.Repeatedly press the button until the desiredmode appears on the display. Multiple presses willcycle through the delivery selections.

224

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gageson your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly – and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lights andgages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with warning lights andgages. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 252.

225

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to knowto drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

226

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with thedriver information center. You can set a Trip A andTrip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Operation and Displays (Using DIC Buttons)on page 245 or DIC Operation and Displays(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem) on page 250.

The odometer mileage can be checked withoutthe vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem onthe instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

Press the reset button, located on the instrumentpanel cluster next to the trip odometer display,to toggle between the trip odometer and theregular odometer. Holding the reset button forapproximately one second while the trip odometeris displayed will reset it.

To display the odometer reading with the ignitionoff, press the reset button.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

227

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driver safetybelt light will also be provided and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime northe light will come on.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 formore information.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 101 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

228

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 90.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

229

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Passenger AirbagStatus

Indicator – UnitedStates

Passenger AirbagStatus

Indicator – Canada

230


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is failsafe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 101 for more onthis, including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 229.

231

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

When this light comes on the DIC will also displaythe battery not charging message. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 252.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine is notrunning, but the ignitionis in RUN, this gageshows your battery’sstate of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The gagemay transition from a higher to lower or a lower tohigher reading, this is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zones indicate thenormal operating range.

232

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and the engine is left atan idle for an extended period. This conditionis normal since the charging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. As enginespeeds are increased, this condition should correctitself as higher engine speeds allow the chargingsystem to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with thereading in either warning zone. If you must drive,turn off all unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate apossible problem in the electrical system. Havethe vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning LightWith the ignition on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set the parking brake.If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged,a chime will sound when the vehicle speed isgreater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and a chimesounds there could be a brake problem. Haveyour brake system inspected right away.

This light may also come on due to low brakefluid. See Brakes on page 459 for moreinformation.

233

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If thelight is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 398.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light willcome on when you startyour engine and maystay on for severalseconds.


234

That’s normal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. You willalso hear a chime sound when the light is onsteady. If the regular brake system warning light isnot on, you still have brakes, but you do nothave anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on you do not have anti-lockbrakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. In addition to both lights, you will also heara chime sound on the first occurrence of aproblem and each time the vehicle is shut off andthen restarted. See Brake System WarningLight on page 233.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to RUN. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light

For vehicles equippedwith the StabiliTrak®

system, this warninglight should comeon briefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of timewhen the system is turned on, your vehicle needsservice. See StabiliTrak® System on page 349for more information.

235

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of how hard yourvehicle is working. During a majority of theoperation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) orless. If you are pulling a load or going up hills,it is normal for the temperature to fluctuateand approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the gagereaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating on page 448.

Tire Pressure Light

If your vehicle isequipped with the TirePressure Monitorsystem, this light willcome on if the systemdetects low tirepressure.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light.

This light will also come on briefly as you start theengine.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 490for more information.

For more information on your tires, see Tires onpage 480.


236

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 421.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired.

237

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 426.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the light off.

238

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 423. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your GM dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

239

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oilpressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when theengine is running. Canadian vehicles indicatepressure in kPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readingsabove the low pressure zone indicate the normaloperating range. When the oil pressure reachesthe low pressure zone, the “OIL PRESSURE LOWSTOP ENGINE” message will appear in theDriver Information Center. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 252 and Engine Oilon page 432 for more information.

A reading in the low pressure zone may becaused by a dangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oil pressure. Checkyour oil as soon as possible.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


240

Oil Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startyour engine.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

That is a check to be sure the light works. If itdoes not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it willbe there to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engineproperly. You could be low on oil and you mighthave some other system problem.

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key toward START.The light will stay onuntil the engine starts.

See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 137 formore information.

241

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamps light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 206 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 200for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 195.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light is displayedwhen the Tow/Haulmode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer onpage 400 and Tow/Haul Mode on page 150.

242

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells youabout how much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before youare out of fuel, and you should get more fuel assoon as possible.

When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage will appear. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 252.

Here are some situations you may experience withyour fuel gage. None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe fuel gage indicated. For example, thegage may have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.


243

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under the fuelgage, will come onbriefly when youare starting the engine.

This light and a chime will come on when the fueltank is low on fuel. There will also be a “FUELLEVEL LOW” message on the Driver InformationCenter, see DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 252 for more information. When you add fuelthis light and message should go off. If it does not,have your vehicle serviced.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle.It also displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated below the tachometer in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

For the displays available using DIC buttons,see “DIC Operation and Displays (UsingDIC Buttons)” later in this section and DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 262.

For the displays available using the trip odometerreset stem, see “DIC Operation and Displays(Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem)” later in thissection.

244

DIC Operation and Displays(Using DIC Buttons)The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons locatedon the instrument panel, next to the steeringwheel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 262 for more information.

You can also use the trip odometer reset stemto view some of the DIC displays. See ″DICOperation and Displays (Using Trip OdometerReset Stem)″ later in this section.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are thetrip/fuel, vehicleinformation,customization, andset/reset buttons.The button functions aredetailed in the followingpages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, and transmissiontemperature.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, units, tire pressure readingsfor vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, engine hours, Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system programming for vehicles with aTPM system, and remote keyless entry transmitterprogramming.

245

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 262 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the odometer.

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “Units” later in this section.

Trip OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distance traveled in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset forthe trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also display the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressingthe set/reset button while the trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset the trip odometerwhile it is displayed by pressing and holdingthe trip odometer reset stem.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least two seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage.

246

For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling. Thedisplay will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if drivingconditions change.

For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even though the sameamount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freeway drivingproduces better fuel economy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold the set/reset button.

Fuel UsedPress the trip/fuel button until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the set/reset buttonwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

247

TimerPress the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time the ignition is off. Timewill continue to be counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is being shown on theDIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theset/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

Transmission TemperaturePress the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMPdisplays. This display shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert you to change youroil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 252. Youshould change your oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil on page 432. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 551 for more information.

248

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE displayaccidentally at any time other than when the oil hasjust been changed. It cannot be reset accuratelyuntil the next oil change. To reset the engine oil lifesystem, see Engine Oil Life System on page 435.

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

Tire PressureIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, the pressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until the DIC displaysREAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 488 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 252 for more information.

Engine HoursPress the vehicle information button until ENGINEHOURS displays. This display shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Relearn Tire PositionsIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, after rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the system must re-learn thetire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, seeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 490.See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 496 andDIC Warnings and Messages on page 252 formore information.

249

Relearn Remote KeyThis display allows you to match remote keylessentry transmitters to your vehicle. To match aremote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle,do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forapproximately 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to LOCK.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

DIC Operation and Displays (UsingTrip Odometer Reset Stem)The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

You can use the trip odometer reset stem to viewthe following displays: odometer, engine hours,trip odometer, and display language.

Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu ItemsOdometerPress the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

Engine HoursTo display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignitionin LOCK or ACCESSORY, then press and holdthe trip odometer reset stem for four seconds whileviewing the ODOMETER. This display showsthe total number of hours the engine has run.

250

Trip OdometerPress the trip odometer reset stem until TRIPdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressingand holding the trip odometer reset stem whilethe trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, pressand hold the trip odometer reset stem for at leastthree seconds. The trip odometer will display thenumber of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)before it is started again, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, the display will show5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

251

LanguageThis display allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear. To selecta language, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETER display, pressand hold the trip odometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currently set languagedisplays.

3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometerreset stem to scroll through all of the availablelanguages.The available languages are ENGLISH(default), FRANCAIS (French), and ESPANOL(Spanish).

4. Once the desired language is displayed,release the trip odometer reset stem toset your choice.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel or the trip odometerreset stem on the instrument panel clusterto acknowledge that you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages will only makethe messages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

252

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message will display when the engine oilneeds to be changed. When you change theengine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 435 for information on how toreset the message. This message will clear itselfafter 10 seconds until the next ignition cycleor until the message is reset. See Engine Oilon page 432 and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 551 for more information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message will display when thepressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needto be checked. This message will also displayLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, orRIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem.

If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown on your TireLoading Information Label. See Tires on page 480,Loading Your Vehicle on page 392, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 488. The DICdisplay also shows the tire pressure values for thefront and rear tires by pressing the vehicleinformation button. See “DIC Operation andDisplays (Using DIC Buttons)” earlier in thissection. If the tire pressure is low, the low tirepressure warninglight will come on. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 236.

DRIVER DOOR OPENIf the driver’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message will displayand a chime will sound. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

253

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)TURNED OFFThis message will display when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 236. To avoid added strain ona hot engine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor will turn back on. You can continueto drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to your engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILIf your vehicle has an oil level sensor and the oillevel in the vehicle is low, this message willdisplay. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition to be surethis message will clear.

This message will clear itself after 10 seconds,until the next ignition cycle. See Engine Oilon page 432 for additional information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 448 formore information.

This message will display when the enginecoolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allowthe vehicle to idle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 236.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 450 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 448 formore information.

254

If the engine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation, this messagewill display and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so toavoid severe damage. This message willclear when the engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message will display and a chime will soundwhen the cooling system temperature gets toohot and the engine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. See Engine Overheatingon page 448 for further information.

This message will also display when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced enginepower can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service as soon aspossible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWIf the fuel level is low, this message will displayand a chime will sound. Refuel as soon aspossible. See Fuel Gage on page 243 and Fuel onpage 423 for more information.

HOOD OPENIf the hood is not fully closed, this message willdisplay and a chime will sound. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the hood for obstructions,and close the hood again. Check to see ifthe message still appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENIf the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear, this message willdisplay and a chime will sound. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

255

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 432 for more information.

If low oil pressure levels occur, this messagewill display. Stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been corrected. Checkyour oil as soon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 432.

PARK ASSIST OFFAfter the vehicle has been started, this messagewill display to remind the driver that the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system has beenturned off. Press the set/reset button or thetrip odometer reset stem to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display. To turnthe URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) on page 208.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear, this message willdisplay and a chime will sound. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPENIf the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignitionis in RUN, this message will display and achime will sound. Turn off the vehicle and checkthe liftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicleand check for the message on the DIC display.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message will display while you are matchinga remote keyless entry transmitter to yourvehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 116 and “DIC Operation andDisplays (Using DIC Buttons)” earlier in thissection for more information.

256

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low,this message will display. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 116.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENIf the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closedand the vehicle is in a drive gear, this messagewill display and a chime will sound. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE AIR BAGIf there is a problem with the airbag system, thismessage will display. Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 229 and Airbag System on page 90for more information.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMOn some vehicles, if there is a problem with thebattery charging system, this message will display.Under certain conditions, the battery warninglight may also turn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Light on page 232.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Havethe electrical system checked as soon as possible.See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMIf there is a problem with the brake system, thismessage will display along with the brake systemwarning light. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 233. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service as soon as possible.See your dealer.

257

SERVICE BRAKES SOONIf there is a problem with the brake system, thismessage will display. If this message appears,stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service. See your dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSISTThis message will display if there is a problemwith the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system. Do not use this system to help you park.See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 208 for more information. See your dealer forservice.

SERVICE STABILITRAKIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this messagedisplays, it means there may be a problemwith the StabiliTrak® system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds; then startthe engine again. If this message still comes on, itmeans there is a problem. You should see yourdealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have the benefit ofStabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and driveaccordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Autoride® suspensionsystem, this message will display when theAutoride® suspension system is not operatingproperly. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

258

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message will display when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrent system. Thevehicle may or may not restart so you may wantto take the vehicle to your dealer before turning offthe engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation onpage 137 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system, this message will display if a parton the system is not working properly. If youdrive your vehicle while any of the four sensorsare missing or inoperable, the warning willcome on in about 20 minutes. A sensor would bemissing, for example, if you put different wheelson your vehicle without transferring the sensors.If the warning comes on and stays on, theremay be a problem with the TPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willdisplay when there is a problem with the tractioncontrol system. When this message is displayed,the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System on page 349 formore information.

STABILITRAK OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message willdisplay when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or whenthe stability control has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However,you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you wantto rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-road conditions andrequire more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390.To turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 349.

259

There are several conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.

• One condition is overheating, which couldoccur if StabiliTrak® activates continuouslyfor an extended period of time.

• The message will also be displayed if thebrake system warning light is on. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 233.

• The message could be displayed if the stabilitysystem takes longer than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to driving conditions.

• If an engine or vehicle related problem hasbeen detected and the vehicle needsservice, the message will appear. See yourdealer.

• The message will also appear if the vehicle isshifted into 4LO.

The message will turn off as soon as theconditions that caused the message to bedisplayed are no longer present.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPIf the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly,this message may display along with the checkengine light on the instrument panel cluster.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 237.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank onpage 426. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turn thislight and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message will display when thesystem is re-learning the tire positions on yourvehicle. See “DIC Operation and Displays (UsingDIC Buttons)” earlier in this section for moreinformation. The tire positions must be re-learnedafter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 496, Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 490, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 488 for more information.

260

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagewill display when the traction control systemis turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 349 for moreinformation.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe transmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,you can damage the transmission. This couldlead to costly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle with overheated transmission fluidor while the transmission temperature warningis displayed.

If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot,this message will display along with a continuouschime. Driving with the transmission fluidtemperature high can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow thetransmission to cool. This message will clearand the chime will stop when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km),this message will display and a chime willsound. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever tothe off position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDIf the washer fluid level is low, this message willdisplay. Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher reservoir will clear the message. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 458.

This message will clear itself after 10 seconds,until the next ignition cycle.

261

DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).

2. Press the customization button to scrollthrough the available customizable options.

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allowsyou to change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until thePRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DIC messages inEnglish.

262

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through the followingsettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appearin French.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

You can also change the language by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section for more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 124for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.

263



AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notto turn off the automatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select which doors andwhen the doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 124for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 116 for more information.

264

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 116 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.

265



DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgatewill be delayed. When locking the doors andliftgate with the power door lock switch or theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter anda door or the liftgate is open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You will hearthree chimes to signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must be out of theignition for this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power door lock switch or the RKE transmittera second time. See Delayed Locking onpage 123 for more information.

Press the customization button until DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door or the liftgate isclosed.



266

EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allowsyou to select the amount of time you wantthe exterior lamps to remain on. This happensafter the vehicle is unlocked using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or if the vehiclekey is turned to LOCK from RUN.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 116 formore information.

267



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loudlevel.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside PowerFoldaway Mirrors on page 161 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

268

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



EASY EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the automatic easy exitseat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals on page 12 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recallwill occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in theignition and remove it again, the seat will stayin the original exit position, unless a memory recalltook place prior to removing the key again.



269

MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the remote memory seatrecall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals on page 12 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recallwill occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will automatically move tothe stored driving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote VehicleStart″ under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 116 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



270

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.

Press the customization button until PRESS V TOEXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

271

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 342. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 342.

272

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 421.

Your vehicle may have a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 141 for more information.

273

Setting the Time (Radio with aSix-Disc CD Player)If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio will have a MENU button insteadof the clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow the instructionsbelow:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed, press the pushbuttonlocated under that label. The HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year) will appear on the display.

2. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the time or date setting labels that youwant to change. Every time the pushbuttonis pressed again, the time or the date ifselected, will increase by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

3. To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or theREV (reverse) button. You can also rotate thetune knob to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hours to 24 hours or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings, followthe instructions below:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed, press the pushbuttonlocated under that label. The 12H (hour) and24H (hour), and the date MM/DD/YYYY(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY(day, month, and year) will appear onthe display.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the MENU button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

274

Setting the Time (Radio with aSingle CD and DVD Player)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD andDVD player, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow the instructionsbelow:

1. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) will appear on the display.

2. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, will increase by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWDbutton.

3. To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow or theREV button. You can also rotate the tuneknob to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hour to 24 hour or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings, followthe instructions below:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel until the time 12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) andDD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)are displayed.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

275

Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and will only workwhen the information is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display.In rare cases, a radio station may broadcastincorrect information that will cause the radiofeatures to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

276

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiois also equipped with Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV). When SCV is on, the radio volumeautomatically adjusts to compensate for roadand wind noise as you speed up or slow downwhile driving. That way, the volume level shouldsound about the same as you drive.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radio volumecompensation. The display will time out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Each higher settingallows for more radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

277

Noise Compensated Volume (NCV): If yourvehicle is equipped with a Bose® Audio System, itincludes Bose AudioPilot® noise compensationtechnology instead of SCV. When turned ON,AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio systemequalization, to compensate for backgroundnoise, so that your music always sounds the sameat the set volume level.

This feature is most effective at lower radiovolume settings where background noise canaffect how well you hear the music being playedthrough your vehicle’s audio system. At highervolume settings, where the music is much louderthan the background noise, there may be littleor no adjustments by AudioPilot®.

To activate NCV:




4. Press the pushbutton under the ON label.The display will time out after approximately10 seconds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. Theradio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio will only seek and scan stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

278

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station,or MP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT mayappear. Continue pressing the information buttonto highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under any one of the labelsand the information about that label will bedisplayed.

When information is not available, No Info willappear on the display.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls (if your vehiclehas them). See Defensive Driving on page 342.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

279

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsappear on the display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD, or REV button until the desired levelsare obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. You will hear a beep and the levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.

280

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designedfor different types of music. Your choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If your radio is equipped with a Bose® audiosystem, your EQ settings are NORMAL, DRIVER,REAR SEAT, or SIMULATED SURROUND(XM and CD modes only).

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.You will hear a beep and the level will be adjustedto the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

281

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Rotate the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed appears on thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio will not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 kmh).

282

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error appears on the display, it meansthat the radio has not been configured properlyfor your vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer for service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 319 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD(s)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player will hold up tosix CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button, Load Discand then Insert Disc 1 will appear on display.

2. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. Loading Disc 1 will appear on display asthe disc is being pulled into the player.

3. Once the CD is loaded, Disc 1 and Track 1will appear on display as the CD startsplayback.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. You will hear a beep and LoadAll Discs will be displayed.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD willstart playing where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

283

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appearon the CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 338 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. You will hear a beepand Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. TheCD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD will be automaticallypulled back into the player and begin playing.

For multiple discs, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

284

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEKarrow is held, or pressed multiple times, theplayer will continue moving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CDplayer. To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or press andhold the LOAD button. You will hear abeep and Load All Discs will be displayed.Insert one or more discs partway into the slotof the CD player.

• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Randomize All Discs isdisplayed. Press the same pushbutton againto turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

285

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and track numberwill appear on the display when a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemwill automatically search for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. Ifa portable audio player is not connected, “no inputdevice found” will be displayed.

Using an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio will play MP3 files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates:32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumwill be available for display by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio will also play discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3 files. By default the radio will show the MP3label on the left side of the screen but will playboth file formats in the order in which theywere recorded to the disc.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

286

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folderfolder, orplaylist names. Long file, folder, or playlistnames, or a combination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists may cause theplayer to be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing discmay cause the disc not to function in theplayer.

You can change playlists by using the previousand next folder buttons, the tuner knob, orthe seek buttons. You can also play an MP3CD-R that was recorded using no file folders.If a CD-R contains more than the maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the playerwill let you access and navigate up to themaximum, but all items over the maximum willnot be accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory will be displayed as the CDlabel. All files contained directly under theroot directory will be accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) willalways be accessed before root folders or files.

If a disc contains both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA) and MP3 files, a folder under theroot directory called CD will access all of theCD audio tracks on the disc.

287

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player will advance to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files and the empty folder will not bedisplayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files will be located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functions will not bedisplayed on a CD-R that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all fileswill be located under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder up buttons will searchplaylists (Px) first and then go to the rootfolder.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R will be played in thefollowing order:

• Play will begin from the first track in the firstplaylist and will continue sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist has been played, playwill continue from the first track of the firstplaylist.

• Play will begin from the first track in the firstfolder and will continue sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has been played, playwill continue from the first track of the firstfolder.

When play enters a new folder, the display will notautomatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as thedefault display. The new track name will appearon the display.

288

File System and NamingThe song name that will be displayed will be thesong name that is contained in the ID3 tag. Ifthe song name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio display will be blank following thetrack indicator.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will nothave playlist editing capability using the radio.These playlists will be treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Wait for the message to insert a disc, label sideup. The player will pull it in, and the CD-R shouldbegin playing.

If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R inthe player it will stay in the player. When youturn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R will start toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.



289

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.



Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,press and release this button. You will hear a beepand Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc will appear on display.The CD-R can be removed. If the CD-R is notremoved, after several seconds, the CD-R will beautomatically pulled back into the player and beginplaying. For multiple discs, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer will continue moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file. The elapsed timeof the file will appear on the display.

290

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file will appear onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toMP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you arelistening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc is displayed.Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Randomize All Discsis displayed. Press the same pushbutton againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The playerwill scan the disc to sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information. It may take severalminutes to scan the disc depending on the numberof MP3 files recorded to the CD-R. The radiomay begin playing while it is scanning the discin the background. When the scan is finished, theCD-R will begin playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the player willdefault to playing MP3 files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on thesecond line of the display between the arrows.Once all songs by that artist are played, the playerwill move to the next artist in alphabetic orderon the CD-R and begin playing MP3 files by thatartist. If you want to listen to MP3 files byanother artist, press the pushbutton located beloweither arrow button. You will go to the next orprevious artist in alphabetic order. Continuepressing either button until the desired artist isdisplayed.

291

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one ofthe buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname is displayed on the second line between thearrows and songs from the current album willbegin to play. Once all songs from that album areplayed, the player will move to the next albumin alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playingMP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberwill appear on the display when a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the system willautomatically search for an auxiliary input devicesuch as a portable audio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “no input device found”will be displayed.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

292

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc.to the auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the car speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device will continue playing, so youmay want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system will beginplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “no input device found” will bedisplayed.

293

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, your vehicle will have a CD/DVDradio. See Rear Seat Entertainment Systemon page 321 for more information on the vehicle’sRSE system.

The DVD player is positioned as the top slot of theradio faceplate. The player is capable of readingthe “DTS” programmed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media (“DTS” and “DTS 2.0” are trademarksof Digital Theater Systems Inc.).

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call letterswill appear on the display. In rare cases, a radiostation may broadcast incorrect information that willcause the radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

294

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise to increase orcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same as youdrive. To activate SCV:




4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCVsetting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volume compensation. Thedisplay will time out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allows formore radio volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Noise Compensated Volume (NCV): If yourvehicle is equipped with a Bose® Audio System, itincludes Bose AudioPilot® noise compensationtechnology instead of SCV. When turned ON,AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio systemequalization, to compensate for backgroundnoise, so that your music always sounds the sameat the set volume level.

This feature is most effective at lower radiovolume settings where background noise canaffect how well you hear the music being playedthrough your vehicle’s audio system. At highervolume settings, where the music is much louderthan the background noise, there may be littleor no adjustments by AudioPilot®.

To activate NCV:




8. Press the pushbutton under the ON label.The display will time out after approximately10 seconds.

295

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display willshow the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. Theradio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio will only seek and scan stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CATmay appear. Continue pressing the informationbutton to highlight the desired label, or pressthe pushbutton positioned under any one of thelabels and the information about that label will bedisplayed.

When information is not available, No Info willappear on the display.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has them. See Defensive Driving onpage 342.

296

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

297

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsappear on the display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. If a station’s frequencyis weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble tothe middle position, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB labelfor more than two seconds. You will hear abeep and the level will be adjusted to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. Your choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If your radio is equipped with a Bose® audiosystem, your EQ settings are either MANUALor TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Pressthe pushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

298

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.You will hear a beep and the level will be adjustedto the middle position.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to themiddle position at one time, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.Another way to navigate the category listis to press the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT label.

3. Rotate the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category name alongwith the word Removed appears on thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

299

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio will not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster thanfive mph (eight kmh).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error appears on the display, it meansthat the radio has not been configured properlyfor your vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer for service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 319 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull it in and the CD shouldbegin playing (loading a disc into the system,depending on media type and format ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it will stay in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD willstart playing where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source. The CD is controlled by thebuttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 333 formore information. The DVD/CD decks, (upperslot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is theCD deck) of the radio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CDsymbol will appear on the left side of the radiodisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

300

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.




Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a soft marker instead.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD that is currently playingin the bottom slot. You will hear a beep andEjecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. TheCD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,after several seconds, the CD will be automaticallypulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

301

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD that is currently playingin the top slot. You will hear a beep and EjectingDisc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD canbe removed. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD will be automaticallypulled back into the player.


f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanfive seconds have played. If less than five secondshave played, the previous track will be played.Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track.If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player will continue moving backward orforward through the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis pushbutton to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track will appear on thedisplay.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. To play the tracks from the CD, press theDVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD,or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDMlabel will appear on display. Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc is displayed. Press the pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD willremain safely inside the radio for future listeningor viewing entertainment.

302

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number will appear ondisplay when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system will automaticallysearch for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “no aux input device” will bedisplayed. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and theCD slot the DVD/CD AUX button will cycle betweenthe two sources and not indicate “no aux inputdevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button will cycle through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, andRear AUX (if available). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321, “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” for more information.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seatoperator can turn on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)through the remote control.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard throughthe speakers at one time. An audio sourceis defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,Front Aux Jack, or Rear Aux Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard through all of the vehiclespeakers.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or theDVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sfront auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers will be able to listento playback from this source through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”later in this section, or Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 321, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” formore information.

In some vehicles, depending on audio options,the rear speakers can be muted when theRSA power is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 333 for more information.

303

Using an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscCompressed Audio or Mixed Mode DiscsThe radio will also play discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radio will readonly the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignorethe MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On theCD deck, pressing the CAT button will togglebetween compressed and uncompressed audioformat, the default being the uncompressedformat (.CDA).

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read andplay a maximum combination of 512 files andfolders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able toread 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .plsextension (other file extensions may not work).

304

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists may cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc maycause the disc not to function in the player.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory will be displayed as F1ROOT. All files contained directly under the rootdirectory will be accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) willalways be accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player will advance to thenext folder in the file structure that containscompressed audio files and the empty folder willnot be displayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files will be located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functions will not bedisplayed on a CD-R that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displaying the name ofthe folder the radio will display ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all fileswill be located under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder up buttons will searchplaylists (Px) first and then go to the rootfolder. When the radio displays the name of thefolder the radio will display ROOT.

305

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R will be played in thefollowing order:

• Play will begin from the first track in the firstplaylist and will continue sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist has been played, playwill continue from the first track of the firstplaylist.

• Play will begin from the first track in the firstfolder and will continue sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has been played, play willcontinue from the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display will notautomatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as thedefault display. The new track name will appearon the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that will be displayed will bethe song name that is contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio will display the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages will be shortened. The display will not showparts of words on the last page of text and theextension of the filename will not be displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will nothave playlist editing capability using the radio.These playlists will be treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

306

Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD-R partway into either the top orbottom slot, label side up. The player will pull it in,and the CD-R should begin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkeymenu will appear and allow navigation of the disc.The menu will read left to right as RDM(Randomize song play order), a Folder icon withleft and right arrows (to move up or downthrough available folders), a PL tag if the disc hasa Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag.If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key bringsup a Folder softkey only or the menu aspreviously described.

If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R inthe player it will stay in the player. When youturn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R will start toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.


307


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a soft marker instead.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CDeject button to eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying in the bottom slot. You will hear abeep and Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Disc will appearon display. The CD-R can be removed. If the CD-Ris not removed, after several seconds, the CD-Rwill be automatically pulled back into the player.


Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD ejectbutton to eject the CD-R that is currently playing inthe top slot. You will hear a beep and Ejecting Discwill be displayed. Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc will appear on display. The CD-R can beremoved. If the CD-R is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD-R will be automatically pulled backinto the player. If loading and reading of a CDcannot be completed, such as unknown format,etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold theDVD eject button for more than five seconds toforce the disc to eject.

308

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanfive seconds have played. If less than five secondshave played, the previous MP3 file will beplayed. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to thenext MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held,or pressed multiple times, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the MP3files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file will appear on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file will appear onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toMP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather thansequential order. To play MP3 files from the CD-Ryou are listening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc is displayed. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

309

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The playerwill scan the disc to sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information. It may take severalminutes to scan the disc depending on the numberof MP3 files recorded to the CD-R.

To cancel music navigator while the player isscanning, press the pushbutton located below themusic navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio may begin playing while it is scanningthe disc in the background. When the scan isfinished, the CD-R will begin playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the player willdefault to playing MP3 files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. If youwant to listen to MP3 files by another artist,press the pushbutton located below either arrowbutton. You will go to the next or previousartist in alphabetic order. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one ofthe buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname is displayed on the second line between thearrows and songs from the current album willbegin to play. Once all songs from that album areplayed, the player will move to the next albumin alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playingMP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVDwill remain safely inside the radio for futurelistening or viewing entertainment.

310

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number will appear ondisplay when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system will automaticallysearch for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “no aux input device” will bedisplayed. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and theCD slot the DVD/CD AUX button will cycle betweenthe two sources and not indicate “no aux inputdevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button will cycle through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, andRear AUX (if available). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321, “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” for more information.

If a MP3 is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seatoperator can turn on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)through the remote control.

CD MessagesIf these messages appear on the display and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

Optical Error: If the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with aninvalid or unknown format.

Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or discEJECT problems.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

311

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe remote control, or by the RSA system,or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 321 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 333 for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible withmost audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 321 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number will appear ondisplay when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system will automaticallysearch for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “no aux input device” will bedisplayed. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and theCD slot the DVD/CD AUX button will cycle betweenthe two sources and not indicate “no aux inputdevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button will cycle through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, andRear AUX (if available). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack(s)” later in this section, or Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321, “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” for more information.

312

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on.Turn this knob clockwise to increase the volumeor counterclockwise to decrease the volume.A single press turns the radio off, a press and holdfor more than two seconds turns off the entireradio and rear seat entertainment systemand starts the parental control feature whichprevents the rear seat occupant from operatingthe Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remotecontrol.

A lock symbol will appear next to the clockdisplay. The parental control feature will remain onuntil a subsequent press and hold of the powerbutton is performed (more than two seconds),or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits thevehicle.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on aCD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or tochange clock or date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See the informationgiven earlier in this section specific to the radio,CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Time(Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player) on page 274 orSetting the Time (Radio with a Single CD andDVD Player) on page 275, for setting the clockand date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to go to the next track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the CD or DVD, five times the normalspeed. The radio will display the elapsedtime while in fast reverse. To stop fast reversing,press this button again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the CD or DVD. The radio will displaythe elapsed time and will fast forward five timesthe normal speed. To stop fast forwarding,press this button again. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

313

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD orDVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,the player will automatically pull it back in after15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the CD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menuwill show several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-Vmenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321 for moreinformation. The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V is inserted into theDVD slot.

r /j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press theplay button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs will begin playing after the previewshave finished, although there may be a delayof up to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not beginplaying the movie automatically, press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. If the DVD still does notplay, refer to the on-screen instructions, ifavailable.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

314

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menuwill show several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-Amenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321 for moreinformation. The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when the DVD-A isinserted into the DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r /j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press this button to cycle throughmusical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

315

e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cyclethrough audio steam formats located on DVD-Adisc. There is not any type of notification forthe customer to see through the radio display, butVSM will have a text field that will show audiostream changing.

Inserting a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playermay not accept some paper labeled media. Theplayer will start loading the disc into the systemand display “Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio will display asoftkey menu of option(s). Some discs willautomatically play the movie while others willdefault to the softkey menu display which requiresthe Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to bepressed (either by softkey or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control).

Loading a disc into the system, dependingon media type and format, ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CDAUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD shouldresume play from where it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stop button hasnot been pressed twice on the remote control.If the disc has been ejected or the stop button hasbeen pressed twice on the remote control, thedisc will resume playing at the beginning ofthe disc.

316

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject thedisc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, butnot removed, the radio will reload the disc after ashort period of time. The disc will be stored inthe radio. The radio will not resume play of the discautomatically. If the RSA system is sourced tothe DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVDplayer will begin to play again. In case loadingand reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails toeject, press and hold the DVD Eject button morethan 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This message is displayed whenthere are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is inserted with the disc labelwrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message will bedisplayed, if no disc is present when the EJECT orDVD/CD AUX button is pressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate. Thisis not an audio output; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack. You canhowever, connect an external audio device such asan iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for audio listening.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, the radioautomatically begins playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

317

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliaryinput over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Auxbutton on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”is displayed on the radio. The RSA or DVDScreen must be on in order for the radio to sourceto rear auxiliary.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need to doadditional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device will continue playing, so youmay want to stop it or power it off.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label anda message showing track or chapter numberwill appear on display when a disc is in either slot.Press this button again and the system willautomatically search for an auxiliary input device,such as a portable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, “no aux inputdevice” will be displayed. If a disc is in both theDVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX buttonwill cycle between the two sources and notindicate “no aux input device”. If a front auxiliarydevice is connected, the DVD/CD AUX buttonwill cycle through all available options, such as:DVD slot, CD slot, Front AUX, and Rear AUX(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section, or Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 321, “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” for more information.

318

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

319

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theftlock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

320

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio. The RSEsystem includes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control. See Radio withCD and DVD on page 294 for more informationon the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system may or may not work until thetemperature is within the operating range.The operating range for the RSE system isabove −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).If the temperature of your vehicle is outside ofthis range, heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operating range of theRSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may have a Parental Controlfeature, depending on which radio you have. TheParental Control feature will turn off the videoscreen and Rear Seat Audio (RSA). This featurealso disables all button operations from the remotecontrol and all audio button operations from theRSA. This feature can be used to gain theattention of the rear passengers that are usingheadphones.

321

To enable Parental Control press and hold theradio power button for more than two seconds.If on, the radio, video screen, and RSA will turn off.If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it will be stopped.A “padlock” icon or a text message may bedisplayed on the radio display depending on whichradio you have, while Parental Control is on.The radio can be turned back on with a singlepress of the power button and used normally, butthe RSE system will remain in Parental Control.

To turn off Parental Control, press and holdthe radio power button for more than two seconds.The video screen and RSA will return to thestate they were in before Parental Control wasturned on. The padlock icon will disappear from theradio display.

Parental Control can also be turned off by insertingor ejecting any disc, an ignition cycle, or pressingthe play icon on the radio DVD display menu.

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channel wirelessheadphones that are dedicated to this system.These headphones are used to listen to mediasuch as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, or anyauxiliary source connected to the auxiliary inputjack, if your vehicle has this feature or A/Vjacks. The wireless headphones have an On/Offbutton channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.

If your vehicle has a third row video screendisplay, it will have two additional headphones.

322

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphoneswill illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to Off whennot in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the videoscreen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections.

The infrared transmitters are located at the rear ofthe RSE overhead console. The headphoneswill shut off automatically to save the battery powerif the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if theheadphones are out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If you move toofar forward or step out of the vehicle, theheadphones will lose the audio signal.

The headphones will automatically turn off afterfour hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)will appear on the upper left side, above the earpad and should be positioned on the left ear.The symbol R (Right) will appear on the upperright side, above the ear pad and should bepositioned on the right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

The foam ear pads attached to the headphonesmay become worn or damaged if they arenot handled or stored properly. If the foam earpads do become damaged or worn out, the padscan be replaced separately from the headphoneset. It is not necessary to replace the completeheadphone set. The headphone replacement foamear pads can be ordered in pairs. See yourdealer for more information.

323

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver toloosen, then slide open the battery doorlocated on the left side of the headphones.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floorconsole. The A/V jacks allow audio or videosignals to be connected from an auxiliary devicesuch as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapter connectors or cablesmay be required to connect the auxiliary device tothe A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

324

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack is for the video input. The white jack is forthe left audio input. The red jack is for theright audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If thevideo screen is in the DVD player mode, pressingthe AUX button on the remote control willswitch the video screen from the DVD playermode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listento the audio of the connected auxiliary deviceby sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD andDVD on page 294 for more information.

How to Change the RSE Video ScreenSettingsThe screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),screen brightness, and setup menu languagecan be changed from the on screen setup menu.To change any feature, perform the following:

1. Press the display menu button on the remotecontrol.

2. Use the remote control menu navigationarrows and the enter button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the display menu button again toremove the setup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs maybe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rearseat audio system, if your vehicle has thisfeature.

325

The RSE system will always transmit the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

The DVD player is capable of outputting audio tothe wired headphone jacks on the RSA system,if your vehicle has this feature. The DVDplayer may be selected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) onpage 333 for more information.

When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliaryinput jack, if your vehicle has this feature, or A/Vjacks, the rear seat passengers will be able to hearaudio from the auxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seat passengerswill be able to listen to playback from this devicethrough the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX asthe source on the radio.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on the RSEoverhead console.

2. Rotate the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to itslocked position, the screen will remain on, thisis normal, and the DVD will continue to playthrough the previous audio source. Use the remotecontrol power button or eject the disc to turn offthe screen.

The RSE overhead console contains the infraredreceivers for the wireless headphones and theinfrared receivers for the remote control. They arelocated at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

326

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light may affect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem to beworking, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sight may also affectthe function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, theremote control power button can be used to turnon the video screen display and start the disc. Theradio can also turn on the video screen display.See Radio with CD and DVD on page 294for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlightwill automatically time out after seven toten seconds if no other button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

327

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD. This function mayvary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different onevery DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVDmenu. After making a selection press the enterbutton. This button only operates when usinga DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Pressthis button twice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,you may be able to do slow play by pressingthe pause button then pressing the fast forwardbutton. The DVD will continue playing in aslow play mode. You may also, depending on theradio, perform reverse slow play by pressingthe pause button and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow play mode, pressthe play/pause button.

328

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing aDVD video, press the play button. To stopfast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastforwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

329

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to change cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature when aDVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater thannine. Press this button before entering the number.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

330

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

turned on or in accessory.The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on the topand bottom or on bothsides or it looksstretched out.

Check the display modesettings in the setup menuby pressing the displaymenu button on theremote control.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

The remote controldoes not work.

Check to make sure thereis no obstruction betweenthe remote control and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player,I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left offand sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player will resumeplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressed twotimes the DVD player willbegin to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cutsout or buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone inthe vehicle.Check that theheadphones are oncorrectly using the L (left)and R (right) on theheadphones.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

331

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends onwhich radio you have. The video screen maydisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message isdisplayed when there are disc load or ejectproblems.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is inserted with the disc labelwrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message will bedisplayed, if no disc is present when the EJECTbutton is pressed on the radio.

DVD DistortionVideo distortion may occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, orwalkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,use only a clean cloth dampened with cleanwater.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage may result.

332

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the music sources: radio,CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,the rear seat passengers can only control themusic sources the front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radios wheredual control is allowed). For example, rear seatpassengers can listen to and control a CD throughthe headphones, while the driver listens to theradio through the speakers. The rear seatpassengers have control of the volume for eachset of wired headphones.

You may operate the RSA functions even whenthe main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

The front audio system will display the headphoneicon when the RSA is on and the headphoneicon will disappear from the display when it is off.

P (Power): Press this button to turn RSA onand off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones and theright knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

333

©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, orXM™ (if equipped), press the seek up or the seekdown arrow to go to the next or the previousstation or channels and stay there. This functionis inactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display will stop flashing afterthe buttons have not been pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press the seek up arrowto go to the next track or chapter on the disc.Press the seek down arrow to go back to the startof the current track or chapter (if more thanten seconds have played). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow toperform a cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow toperform a cursor right or left on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD orDVD audio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listening tothe disc.

When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,press this button to select the next disc, ifmultiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the PROG button to perform the menufunction, Enter.

334

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operateand LOCKED will appear on the display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® isarmed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Your vehicle has audiosteering wheel controls,they may differdepending on yourvehicle’s options. Someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthe steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous track orchapter.

335

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, ifyour vehicle has these features, will not bemuted. Press and release this button again, toturn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressand hold this button for longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition”in the Navigation System manual for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also hasthe navigation system, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode. See the OnStar® System on page 164 inthis manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped). Press this button to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced to the DVDslot. Press the button to go to the next disc whilesourced to a CD or DVD changer, if multiplediscs are loaded.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet. Ifthere is interference or static, unplug the item fromthe accessory power outlet.

336

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

337

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Rear Side Window AntennaYour AM-FM antenna is located in the passengerrear side window. Be sure that the insidesurfaces of the rear side window is not scratchedand that the lines on the glass are not damaged.If the inside surfaces are damaged, they couldinterfere with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside of the rear side windowsmay affect radio reception or damage theantenna. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearside windows with sharp objects.

338

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your antenna due to metallic tintingmaterials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Because this antenna is built into your rear sidewindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If you choose to add an aftermarket cellulartelephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needsto be attached to the glass, be sure that youdo not damage the grid lines for the AM-FMantennas or place the cellular telephone antennaover the grid lines.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

339

✍ NOTES

340

Your Driving, the Road, and YourVehicle ..................................................... 342Defensive Driving ...................................... 342Drunken Driving ........................................ 343Control of a Vehicle .................................. 346Braking ...................................................... 346Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 347Braking in Emergencies ............................. 349Locking Differential .................................... 349StabiliTrak® System ................................... 349All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 353Steering .................................................... 353Off-Road Recovery .................................... 355Passing ..................................................... 356Loss of Control .......................................... 357Off-Road Driving ........................................ 359Driving at Night ......................................... 375Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 376City Driving ............................................... 380

Freeway Driving ........................................ 381Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 382Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 383Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 384Winter Driving ........................................... 386If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 390Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 390Recovery Hooks ........................................ 391Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 392

Towing ........................................................ 398Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 398Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 398Level Control ............................................. 399Autoride® ................................................... 399Towing a Trailer ........................................ 400Trailer Recommendations .......................... 415

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

341

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 38.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

342

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking. Forpersons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

343

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent afterthree to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as wehave seen, it depends on how much alcohol isin the drinks, and how quickly the persondrinks them.

344

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are with agroup, designate a driver who will notdrink.

345

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehiclego where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 421.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 233.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then youhave to bring up your foot and do it. That isreaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

346

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops. Yourbrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving,brake normally but do not pump your brakes. If youdo, the pedal may get harder to push down. Ifyour engine stops, you will still have some powerbrake assist. But you will use it when youbrake. Once the power assist is used up, it maytake longer to stop and the brake pedal willbe harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 234.

Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic RearProportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRPproblem, both the brake and ABS warning lightswill come on accompanied by a 10-secondchime. The lights and chime will come on eachtime the ignition is turned on until the problem isrepaired. See your dealer for service.

347

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

348

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Locking DifferentialIf your vehicle has this feature, your lockingdifferential can give you additional traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standardaxle most of the time, but when one of the wheelshas no traction and the other does, this feature willallow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

StabiliTrak ® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with theStabiliTrak® system which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability control systems andhelps the driver maintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. Youmay hear or feel the system working. Thisis normal and does not mean there is a problemwith your vehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).In some cases, it may take approximatelytwo miles of driving before the system initializes.

349

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theStabiliTrak® light along with one of the followingmessages will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROLOFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. Ifthese DIC messages appear, make sure theStabiliTrak® system has not been turned off usingthe StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn thesteering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clockposition to the three o’clock position. If this clearsthe message(s), your vehicle does not needservicing. If this does not clear the message(s),then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and thenturn it back on again to reset the system. If anyof these messages still appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), your vehicle should betaken in for service. For more information onthe DIC messages, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 244.

The StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the system isboth on and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

The traction controldisable button is locatedon the instrumentpanel below the climatecontrols.

The traction control part of StabiliTrak® canbe turned off by pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak® button if both systems (traction controland StabiliTrak®) were previously on. To disableboth traction control and StabiliTrak®, pressand hold the button for five seconds.

350

Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turnedon by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak®

button if not automatically shut off for any otherreason.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turnedoff, the StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCSoff or StabiliTrak® off message will be displayedon the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will stillhave brake-traction control when traction controlis off, but will not be able to use the engine speedmanagement system. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for more information.

When the traction control system has been turnedoff, you may still hear system noises as a resultof the brake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 390.

When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak®

light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC. Both tractioncontrol and StabiliTrak® are automatically disabledin this condition.

351

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle. It willactivate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash ifit senses that any of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while driving. If you turnoff traction control, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction control will work. Theengine speed management will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axleto spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ®, ABSand brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed,you could damage the transfer case. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Reduce engine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while these lights and thismessage are displayed.

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transmission. Whenthis happens, you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 200.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer forservice.

352

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemWith this feature, engine power is sent to allfour wheels all the time.

This is like four-wheel drive, but there is noseparate lever or switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itselfas needed for road conditions.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels. Ifthere is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

353

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 346. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

354

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

355

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,then goes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

356

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulderand start your left lane change signal beforemoving out of the right lane to pass. When youare far enough ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front in your inside mirror, activate yourright lane change signal and move back into theright lane. Remember that if your passengerside outside mirror is convex, the vehicle youjust passed may seem to be farther away fromyou than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

357

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

358

Off-Road DrivingIf your vehicle has 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies,you should not drive off-road unless you areon a level, solid surface. See Tires on page 480.

Many of the same design features that helpmake your vehicle responsive on paved roadsduring poor weather conditions — featureslike all-wheel drive — help make it much bettersuited for off-road use than a conventionalpassenger car. Its higher ground clearance alsohelps your vehicle step over some off-roadobstacles. But your vehicle does not have featureslike special underbody shielding and a transfercase low gear range, things that are usuallythought necessary for extended or severe off-roadservice. This guide is for operating your vehicleoff paved roads.

Also, see Braking on page 346.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does havesome definite hazards. The greatest of these isthe terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanesare not marked. Curves are not banked. There areno road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have goneright back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. Andthat is why it is very important that you readthis guide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

If you think you will need some more groundclearance at the front of your vehicle, youcan remove the front fascia lower air dam.

The front fascia lower air dam is held in place bytwo bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts andsnap features are accessible from underneath thefront fascia.

359

The following steps must be performed on thebolts and snap features to remove the air dam:

1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.

2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down onthe snap features and disengage the snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps aredisengaged, push forward on the air dam untilit is free.

When you are back on roads, though, be sure toreplace the air dam.

Notice: Operating your vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascia lower airdam installed can cause improper air flow tothe engine. Always be sure to replace the frontfascia air dam when you are finished off-roaddriving.

To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:

1. Line up the snap features and push theair dam rearward to engage the snaps.

2. Install the two outboard bolts.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached. Is there enoughfuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluidlevels up where they should be? What arethe local laws that apply to off-roading where youwill be driving? If you do not know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement people in thearea. Will you be on someone’s private land? Ifso, be sure to get the necessary permission.

360

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of the rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 392and Tires on page 480.

361

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey allposted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground).

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure allrefuse is removed from any campsitebefore leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials that couldcatch fire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain andplan your route. You are much less likely to getbad surprises. Get accurate maps of trailsand terrain. Try to learn of any blocked orclosed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure toread the winch instructions. In a remote area, awinch can be handy if you get stuck. But you willwant to know how to use it properly.

362

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require some newand different driving skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, youwill need to respond to vibrations and vehiclebounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways tocontrol your vehicle is to control your speed.

Here are some things to keep in mind. At higherspeeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when youdrive over obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This couldcause you to lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or off the road,you and your passengers should wearsafety belts.

363

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features. Hereare some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the steering, acceleration, and braking ofyour vehicle in different ways. Depending upon thekind of surface you are on, you may experienceslipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayedacceleration, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly upahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands if you are notprepared.

364

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe and whatis not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 343.

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

365

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if it isone of those hills that is just too steep to climb,descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.On a very small hill, for example, there may be asmooth, constant incline with only a small change inelevation where you can easily see all the way tothe top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeperas you near the top, but you may not see thisbecause the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Here are some things to consider as you approacha hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,or ruts?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get outand walk the hill if you do not know. It is thesmart way to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are more susceptible tothe effects of erosion.

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

366

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of thehill to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day. Theymake you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, oris about to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If the engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down thehill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

367

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way, you will be able to tell if thewheels are straight and maneuver as youback down. It is best that you back down thehill with the wheels straight rather than inthe left or right direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right will increase thepossibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shiftinginto NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engineand regain forward momentum. This willnot work. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stopthe vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steepenough to cause you to roll over if you turnaround. If you cannot make it up the hill, youmust back straight down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it. Whatshould I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission inPARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on theuphill side and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill.

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

368

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpthe brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll overif you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”The brakes will have to do all the workand could overheat and fade.

369

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill, here iswhat to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out andget help.

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up ordown may be too steep to drive across. Whenyou go straight up or down a hill, the lengthof the wheel base — the distance fromthe front wheels to the rear wheels — reducesthe likelihood the vehicle will tumble endover end. But when you drive acrossan incline, the much more narrow trackwidth — the distance between the left andright wheels — may not prevent the vehiclefrom tilting and rolling over. Also, drivingacross an incline puts more weight onthe downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem whenyou drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can cause your tiresto slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicleslips sideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

370

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Findanother route instead.

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill. Whatshould I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.

371

Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerateas quickly, turning is more difficult, and youwill need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Inreally deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

372

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tireswill tend to sink into the sand. This has an effecton steering, accelerating, and braking. Driveat a reduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction is sopoor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And ifyou do get moving, poor steering and difficultbraking can cause you to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

373

Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover the wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage the axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can alsooccur if you get the tailpipe under water. And,as long as the tailpipe is under water, youwill never be able to start the engine. When yougo through water, remember that when the brakesget wet, it may take you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads onpage 376 for more information on drivingthrough water.

374

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected onthe underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

375

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do nothave much tread left, you will get even lesstraction.

376

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious ifrain starts to fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your reflexes aretuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, tryto slow down before you hit them.

377

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

378

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 480.

379

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 381.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

380

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Tryto merge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

381

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion. Afterdriving for any distance at higher speeds, you maytend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

382

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash and beinjured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

383

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 359 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

384

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The mostimportant thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the slowing down. Shift to alower gear when you go down a steep orlong hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, andyou can climb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving ontwo-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do notswing wide or cut across the center ofthe road. Drive at speeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane, like astalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountainsthat warn of special problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or no-passing zones,a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Bealert to these and take appropriate action.

385

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 480.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

386

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 347.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

387

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

388

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

389

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others couldbe injured. And, the transmission or otherparts of the vehicle can overheat. Thatcould cause an engine compartment fireor other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Donot spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting yourtransmission back and forth, you can destroyyour transmission.

For more information about using tire chains onyour vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 504.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. If yourvehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn thesystem off by pressing the StabiliTrak® button sothat the STABILITY SYS DISABLED messageand the traction off light are illuminated on theinstrument panel cluster. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear.

390

By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward andreverse directions, you will cause a rocking motionthat may free your vehicle. If that does not get youout after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.Or, you can use your recovery hooks. If you doneed to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 398.

Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lotof force. Always pull the vehicle straightout. Never pull on the hooks at asideways angle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

Your vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of thevehicle. You may need to use them if you arestuck off-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

391

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it was designed to carry, the Tireand Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver’s door open, you will find the labelattached below the door lock post (striker). Thetire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

Label Example

392

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 480 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 488.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle. See Towinga Trailer on page 400 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

393

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

394




1000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is foundon the rear edge of the driver’s door. Thelabel shows the size of your vehicle’s original tiresand the inflation pressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

Example 3

395

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Your warranty does not cover parts or componentsthat fail because of overloading.

The label will help you decide how much cargoand installed equipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspension components toget added durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

396

If you put things inside your vehicle – likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else – theygo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’llkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There’s also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-RoadDriving on page 359.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rear suspensioncomes as a part of the Autoride® suspension. SeeAutoride® on page 399.

This type of level control is fully automatic and willprovide a better leveled riding position as wellas better handling under a variety of passengerand loading conditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated when theignition key is turned to RUN and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter. The systemmay exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to10 minutes after the ignition key has been turnedto OFF. You may hear the air compressoroperating when the height is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it isrecommended to allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting theheight.

397

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 575.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

Dinghy Towing and Dolly TowingAll-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even withonly two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed with anyof the wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 398.

398

Level Control

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rear suspension isavailable on light-duty vehicles and comesas a part of the Autoride® suspension, if equipped.

This type of level control is fully automatic andwill provide a better leveled riding position as wellas better handling under a variety of passengerand loading conditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shocks will raise or lowerthe rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated when theignition key is turned to RUN and will automaticallyadjust vehicle height thereafter. The systemmay exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up toten minutes after the ignition key has been turnedoff. You may hear the air compressor operatingwhen the height is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it isrecommended to allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting thehitch.

Autoride ®

The Autoride® feature provides improved vehicleride and handling under a variety of passenger andloading conditions.

The system is fully automatic and uses a computercontroller to continuously monitor vehicle speed,wheel to body position, lift/dive and steeringposition of the vehicle. The controller then sendssignals to each shock absorber to independentlyadjust the damping level to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul modethat, when activated, will provide additional controlof the shock absorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handling characteristicswhen the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer onpage 400 for more information.

399

Towing a TrailerDo not tow a trailer during break-in. See NewVehicle Break-In on page 139 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. To pulla trailer correctly, follow the advice in thispart, and see your dealer for importantinformation about towing a trailer with yourvehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity for your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

400

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, ifnecessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions). See “Tow/HaulMode” under Towing a Trailer on page 400.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires

Tow/Haul ModeThe Tow/Haul feature assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purposeof the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency and improve thepredictability of transmission shifts whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed whilerequiring less throttle pedal activity whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

401

Press this button at the end of the shift lever toenable tow/haul mode.

When the button is pressed, a light on theinstrument panel will illuminate to indicate thatTow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul maybe turned off by pressing the button again, atwhich time the indicator light on the instrumentpanel will turn off. The vehicle will automaticallyturn off tow/haul every time it is started.

Tow/Haul is designed to be most effectivewhen the vehicle and trailer combined weightis at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s GrossCombination Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weightof the Trailer” later in this section. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the following driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load through rolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in stop and go traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in busy parking lots whereimproved low speed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

402

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determine how muchyour vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehiclemodel and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight **GCWRYukon Denali 3.42 7,400 lbs (3 356 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)Yukon XL Denali 3.42 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at theaddress listed in your Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

403

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 392 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B),up to a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with aweight carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A)should be 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight, up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs(453 kg) with a weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

404

After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacity morethan the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), aRGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR(Gross Combination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will begreater than just the weight itself, as much as1.5 times as much. The weight at the rearaxle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg)brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).This is very close to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer upto 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

405

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on therear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceedingRGAWR.

The effect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent oftotal loaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

406

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification label at the rear edge of thedriver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle for moreinformation. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue. If you use aweight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t goover the rear axle limit before you apply the weightdistribution spring bars.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch.

Weight Distributing Hitches and WeightCarrying Hitches

A. Body to Ground DistanceB. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitchmust be adjusted so the distance (A) remainsthe same both before and after coupling the trailerto the tow vehicle.

407

If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper couldbe damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there isample room when turning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, willweigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure touse a properly mounted weight-distributing hitchand sway control of the proper size. This equipmentis very important for proper vehicle loading andgood handling when driving. Always use a swaycontrol if the trailer will weigh more than theselimits. You can ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrols.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Alwaysleave just enough slack so you can turn with yourrig. Never allow safety chains to drag on theground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and theymust be adequate. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Since your vehicle is equipped with theStabiliTrak® system, your trailer brake systemcannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem.

408

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness or death. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 156. To maximizeyour safety when towing a trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.



• If exhaust does come into your vehiclethrough a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 214.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

409

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

410

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerThe arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,a lower gear selection if the transmission shiftstoo often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions).

You may also want to activate the tow/haul modeif the transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/HaulMode” under Towing a Trailer on page 400.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolant ator near sea level will boil at a lower temperaturethan at higher altitudes. If you turn your engineoff immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked (preferably onlevel ground) with the automatic transmissionin PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If you do get the overheat warning,see Engine Overheating on page 448.

411

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

412

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedaldown while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in thismanual, and the Index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

413

Trailer Wiring HarnessHeavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package

Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wiretrailer towing harness. This harness with aseven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector isattached to the rear bumper beam. It is locatednext to the integrated trailer hitch.

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red w/ Black Stripe: Battery Feed*

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed inthe underhood electrical center, but the circuits arenot connected. They should be installed by yourdealer or a qualified service center.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,press the tow/haul mode button located at theend of the shift lever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery.If the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you canturn on the headlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system and charge the battery.

414

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisionsThese wiring provisions are included with yourvehicle as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiringpackage. These provisions are for an electricbrake controller. The red/black stripe power feedwill not be connected to the battery until thering terminal is unstowed and connected to theunderhood electrical center. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires near the data linkconnector for the trailer brake controller. Theharness contains the following wires:

• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector

• Red/Black: Battery

• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch

• White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealer or a qualifiedservice center.

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch loads from the CargoWeight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximumweight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’tinclude the weight of the people inside, but youcan figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for eachseat. The total cargo load must not be more thanyour vehicles CWR.

Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, sothat you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If youare using a weight-distributing hitch, weigh thevehicle without the spring bars in place.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread outthe weight of your load the right way, and ifyou choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information see Towing a Traileron page 400.

415

✍ NOTES

416

Service ........................................................ 420Accessories and Modifications ................... 421California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 421Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 422Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 423Fuel ............................................................. 423

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 423Gasoline Specifications .............................. 424California Fuel ........................................... 424Additives ................................................... 424Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 425Filling the Tank ......................................... 426Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 428

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 428Hood Release ........................................... 429Engine Compartment Overview .................. 430Engine Oil ................................................. 432Engine Oil Life System .............................. 435

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 437Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 440Engine Coolant .......................................... 445Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 448Engine Overheating ................................... 448Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 450Cooling System ......................................... 451Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 456Power Steering Fluid ................................. 457Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 458Brakes ...................................................... 459Battery ...................................................... 463Jump Starting ............................................ 464

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 469

Rear Axle .................................................... 470

Front Axle ................................................... 471

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 473

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

417

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 476Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 476Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 476License Plate Lamp ................................... 477Replacement Bulbs ................................... 478

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 478Tires ............................................................ 480

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 482Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 485Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 488High-Speed Operation ............................... 490Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 490Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 496When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 497Buying New Tires ...................................... 498Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 500Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 501Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 502Wheel Replacement .................................. 503Tire Chains ............................................... 504

If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 505Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 506Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 507Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 512Secondary Latch System ........................... 518Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 522Spare Tire ................................................. 526

Appearance Care ........................................ 526Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 526Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 528Leather ...................................................... 529Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 529Wood Panels ............................................. 530Speaker Covers ........................................ 530Care of Safety Belts .................................. 530Weatherstrips ............................................ 530Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 530Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 531Finish Care ............................................... 531


418

Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .... 532Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 532Tires ......................................................... 533Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 533Finish Damage .......................................... 534Underbody Maintenance ............................ 534Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 534Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 535

Vehicle Identification .................................. 535Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 536Service Parts Identification Label ............... 536

Electrical System ........................................ 537Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 537Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 537Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 537Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 538Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 538Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 539Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 541

Capacities and Specifications .................... 546


419

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

420

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle. YourGM dealer can accessorize your vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories. When you go to yourGM dealer and ask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

421

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 589.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 106.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 565.

422

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

423

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 424 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehiclemay fail a smog-check test.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 237.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor diagnosis. If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your GM dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

424

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

425

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

426

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignitesit, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel captoo quickly. This spray can happen if yourtank is nearly full, and is more likely in hotweather. Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 530.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 237.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 237.

427

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

428

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it.It is located insidethe vehicle to thelower left of thesteering wheel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locatethe secondary hood release, near the centerof the grille.

3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.

4. Lift the hood.Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then pull down the hoodand close it firmly.

429

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 6.2L engine here is what you will see:

430

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 437.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 437.

C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Cooling System on page 451 and CoolantSurge Tank Pressure Cap on page 448.

D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 464.

E. Battery. See Battery on page 463.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 432.G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Out of View).

See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 440.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND) (Out ofView). See Jump Starting on page 464.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 432.

J. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 451.

K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).See Power Steering Fluid on page 457.

L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 459.

M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 541.

N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 458.

431

Engine OilIf the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL messageappears on the Driver Information Center (DIC),it means you need to check your engine oillevel right away. For more information, seeENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 252.

You should check your engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil everytime you get fuel. In order to get an accuratereading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 430for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

432

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 546.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Push thedipstick all the way back in when you are through.

433

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

434

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M andhave the starburst symbol on the front of the oilcontainer.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor your engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

435

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 252. Change your oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system maynot indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message being turned on, reset thesystem.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theEngine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

436

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 for thelocation of the engineair cleaner/filter andthe air filter restrictionindicator, if thevehicle has one.

437

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterIf your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filterneeds to be replaced. On vehicles with a restrictionindicator, you should inspect the air filterrestriction indicator at every oil change andreplace the engine air cleaner/filter when theindicator tells you to.

On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 551 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterVehicles With an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorLocate the air filter restriction indicator on theengine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicatorturns black or is in the red/orange “change”zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator.See the steps following to replace the engineair cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter restrictionindicator.

Vehicles Without an Air Filter RestrictionIndicatorTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engineair cleaner/filter from the vehicle by followingstep 1 through 6. When you have the engine aircleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

438

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filterand Resetting the Air Filter RestrictionIndicator

1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 430.

2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of thehousing and lift up the cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from thehousing. Care should be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealingsurfaces and the housing.

439

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.

7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, ifthe vehicle has one, by pressing the top buttonon the indicator.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is usually not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leakis the only reason for fluid loss. If you suspecta small leak, then use the following checkingprocedures to check the fluid level. However, ifthere is a large leak, then it may be necessary tohave the vehicle towed to a dealership servicedepartment and have it repaired before driving thevehicle further.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 561.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inthe Maintenance Schedule. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 551. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 561.

440

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level, prepare yourvehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on alevel surface. Keep the engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, move the shift lever back to PARK (P).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm)for at least one minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running and press theTrip/Fuel button until TRANS TEMP(Transmission Temperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determineand perform the appropriate check procedure.If the TRANS TEMP reading is not withinthe required temperature ranges, allowthe vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle untilthe appropriate transmission fluid temperatureis reached.

441

Cold Check ProcedureUse this procedure only as a reference todetermine if the transmission has enough fluid tobe operated safely until a hot check procedurecan be made. The hot check procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluid level. Performthe hot check procedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure to check fluid levelwhen the transmission temperature is between80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear ofthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

The dipstick handle hasthis graphic. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all theway, wait three seconds, and then pull it backout again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. Repeat the check procedure toverify the reading.

442

5. If the fluid level is below the COLD checkband, add only enough fluid as necessaryto bring the level into the COLD band. It doesnot take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunityafter the transmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between 160°F to200°F (71°C to 93°C).

7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Hot Check ProcedureUse this procedure to check the transmission fluidlevel when the transmission fluid temperature isbetween 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).

The hot check is the most accurate method tocheck the fluid level. The hot check should beperformed at the first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level rises as fluidtemperature increases, so it is important to ensurethe transmission temperature is within range.

1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear ofthe engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

The dipstick handle hasthis graphic. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 formore information.

2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

443

3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all theway, wait three seconds, and then pull it backout again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. Repeat the check procedure toverify the reading.

5. Safe operating level is within the HOTcrosshatch band on the dipstick. If thefluid level is not within the HOT band, andthe transmission temperature is between160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or

drain fluid as necessary to bring the levelinto the HOT band. If the fluid level is low,add only enough fluid to bring the levelinto the HOT band. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L).Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Consistency of ReadingsAlways check the fluid level at least twice usingthe procedures described. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintaining proper fluidlevel. If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutesor longer to obtain an accurate reading because ofresidual fluid draining down the dipstick tube.If inconsistent readings persist, check thetransmission breather to be sure it is clean andnot clogged. If readings are still inconsistent,contact your dealer.

444

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 448.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

445

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 561 for more information.

446

Checking CoolantThe coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 430 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

447

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 430 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 236.

In addition, you will find an ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and an ENGINEPOWER IS REDUCED message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 252.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see orhear steam coming from it. Just turn it offand get everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 450 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

448

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 450 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineThe ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINEor the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Traileron page 400.

If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE message with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, andpark your vehicle immediately.

449

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicleis equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan,push down the accelerator until the engine speedis about twice as fast as normal idle speed forat least five minutes while you are parked.

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle isequipped with an electric cooling fan, idle theengine for five minutes while you are parked.

If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine condition exists and theREDUCED ENGINE POWER message isdisplayed, an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this mode, you will notice aloss in power and engine performance. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. Driving extendedmiles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheatprotection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 432.

450

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Surge TankB. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fan

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.Check the coolant level after the system coolsdown. Some amount of coolant may be lost due tooverheating.

451

The coolant level should be at or above theFULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, orsomewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

452

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 450 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ®

may cause premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at or abovethe FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolantat the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 445 for more information.

453

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

454

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure capwhen the coolingsystem, includingthe coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap by slowly turning the pressure capcounterclockwise about one full turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark.

455

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the level reachesthe FULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut offand the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeatcoolant fill procedure steps 1 through 6.

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has electric cooling fans, you mayhear the fans spinning at low speed duringmost everyday driving. The fans may turn off if nocooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading,trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, orif you are operating your air conditioning system,the fans may change to high speed and youmay hear an increase in fan noise. This is normaland indicates that the cooling system isfunctioning properly. The fans will change to lowspeed when additional cooling is no longerrequired.

456

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.If necessary, add only enough fluid to bringthe level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 561.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

457

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidYour vehicle has a message that comes on whenthe washer fluid is low. The message isdisplayed for 15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the CHECK WASHER FLUIDmessage is displayed, you will need to addwasher fluid to the windshield washer fluidreservoir. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 252 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 430for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

458

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 430 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spillon the engine. The fluid will burn if theengine is hot enough. You or others couldbe burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 233.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 551.

459

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be aboveMIN. If it is not, haveyour brake systemchecked to see if thereis a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 561.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

460

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 530.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

461

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

462

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 430 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 464 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

463

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has rundown, you may want to use another vehicle andsome jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

464

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putthe automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radio and all thelamps that are not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal and a remote negative (−)jump starting terminal. You should always usethese remote terminals instead of theterminals on the battery.The remote positive (+) terminal, if equipped, islocated under a red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)terminal, open the red plastic cover.The remote negative (−) terminal is a studlocated on the right front of the engine, wherethe negative battery cable attaches.

465

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 430 for more information on the locationof the remote positive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

466

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal of thevehicle with the deadbattery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to the remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

467

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the remote negative (−) terminal,on the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

468

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover,if equipped, to its original position.

All-Wheel DriveBe sure to perform the lubricant checks describedin this section. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 551.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug

469

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 561.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluidduring production. They are not filled to reacha certain level. When checking the fluid level onany axle, variations in the readings can be causedby factory fill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehiclehas just been driven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower than normal becausefluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area. Therefore, areading taken five minutes after the vehiclehas been driven will appear to have a lower fluidlevel than a vehicle that has been stationaryfor an hour or two. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to get a true reading.

470

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

The proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch(1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the fillerplug hole, located on the rear axle. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the proper level.


Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected and repaired.

471

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

A: Fill Plug

B: Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant:

• When the differential is cold, add enoughlubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm)to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.

• When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.


472

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim of the headlamps have beenpreset at the factory and should need no furtheradjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the aim of the headlamps may be affected andadjustment may be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may mean the vertical aim of yourheadlamps needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to beadjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described in the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be placed so the headlampsare 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice,or mud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing performed.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

• The spare tire is in its proper location in thevehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’slow-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlampswill be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

473

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 429 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground tothe aim dot on the low-beam headlamp.Record the distance.

4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure fromthe ground upward (A) to the recordeddistance from Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallor flat surface the width of the vehicle at theheight of the mark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. This allowsonly the beam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.

474

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can be turned witha E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise toraise or lower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

475

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 478.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed inthis section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal/TaillampC. Back-up Lamp

476

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove thetwo screws fromthe taillampassembly.

2. Remove the taillamp assembly.

3. Press the release tab, if equipped, and turnthe socket counterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.

5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insertthe socket into the taillamp assembly and turnthe socket clockwise into the taillampassembly until it clicks.

6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.

License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps to the molding that is partof the liftgate.

2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the molding opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the licenseplate lamp.

477

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamp 7441

License Plate Lamp 168

Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,and Stoplamp 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 551.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side ofthe blade, and rotate the blade assemblyaway from the arm connector.

478

3. Install the new blade onto the arm connectorand make sure the grooved areas are fully setin the locked position.

For the proper type and size, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 563.

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out

of the park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from thebackglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull itoff of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm inposition and push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.

479

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the parkrest position.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

480

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 392.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 488.



• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badly worn, or ifyour tires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 490for inflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

481

20-Inch TiresIf your vehicle has the optional 20-inchP275/55R20 size tires, they are classified astouring tires and are designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide tread design is notrecommended for off-road driving. See Off-RoadDriving on page 359, for additional information.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustration is an exampleof a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

482

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information, see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 501.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.For information on recommended tire pressuresee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 488and Loading Your Vehicle on page 392.

483

Tire SizeThe following examples show the different parts ofa tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75,as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric)tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewallis 75% as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of atire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

484

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 488.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 392.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 392.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 392.

485

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 392.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 488 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 392.

486

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 497.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 501.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 392.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 392.

487

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), belowthe driver’s door lock post (striker). This label listsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and theirrecommended cold tire inflation pressures.The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,shown on the label, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 392.

488

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the spare tire. For additionalinformation regarding the spare tire, see SpareTire on page 526.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated even whenthey’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

489

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additionalstrain on tires. Sustained high-speeddriving causes excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure. Youcould have a crash and you or otherscould be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustmentfor high speed operation. When speedlimits and road conditions are such thata vehicle can be driven at high speeds,make sure the tires are rated for highspeed operation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20size tires and you will be driving at high speeds,speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, setthe cold inflation pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) abovethe recommended tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information Label. When youend this high-speed driving, return the tires to thecold inflation pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 392 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 488.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,except the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has theDriver Information Center (DIC), the driver may alsocheck tire pressure levels using the DIC.

490

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol located on the instrument panelcluster. If your vehicle has the DIC feature, amessage to check the pressure in a specific tirewill also appear on the DIC display. The lowtire pressure warning symbol on the instrumentpanel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning message on the DIC display will appear ateach ignition cycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Operation and Displays(Using DIC Buttons) on page 245 or DIC Operationand Displays (Using Trip Odometer Reset Stem)on page 250 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 252.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the tire pressure monitor light, located onthe instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message will appear when thevehicle is first started and then turn off as youstart to drive the vehicle. This could be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures are getting low andneed to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

491

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning messageand low tire pressure light (telltale) will comeon each time the vehicle is started until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflation pressure.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 488. For the location of the tire and loadinginformation label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 392.

492

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 496 and Tires on page 480.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

Resetting the TPMS Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need to be matchedto the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passengersside front tire, passengers side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your GM dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the first tire andwheel, or more than five minutes to match allfour tire and wheel positions the matching processstops and you will need to start over.

493

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlinedbelow:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS message displays.

4. Press the set/reset button. The horn willsound twice to indicate the TPMS receiveris ready, and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage will display.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve capstem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressurefor five seconds, or until a horn chirpsounds. The horn chirp, which make take upto 30 seconds to sound, confirms that thesensor identification code has been matchedto this tire and wheel position. To decreaseair-pressure out of a tire you can use thepointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the horn chirp will soundtwo more times to signal the tire learningmode is no longer active. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will bedisplayed on the DIC screen. This message shouldgo off once you re-install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

494

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Industryand Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




495

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 497and Wheel Replacement on page 503 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tightenthe cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 506.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 551.

When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shown on thetire and loading information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 392 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 488, for more information.

496

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the TPMSsensors reset after a tire rotation. See “TPMSSensor Identification Codes” under Tire PressureMonitor System on page 490.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 546.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom places where the wheel attaches tothe vehicle. In an emergency, you can usea cloth or a paper towel to do this; but besure to use a scraper or wire brush later,if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 506.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

497

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 482 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the samesize, brand, and type tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a different sizespare than the road tires (those originallyinstalled on your vehicle). When new, yourvehicle included a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overall diameteras your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,so it is all right to drive on it. Becausethis spare was developed for use on yourvehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.

498

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 490.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 392,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

499

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 498 andAccessories and Modifications on page 421 foradditional information.

500

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

501

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

502

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 506 for moreinformation.

503

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash. Use another type oftraction device only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on your vehicleand tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage toyour vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust orremove the device if it is contacting yourvehicle, and do not spin your wheels.If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

504

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

505

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place.Turn on your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 192for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

506

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need to change a flattire is stored under the storage tray, whichis located on the driver’s side trim panel (overthe rear wheelhouse).

1. Remove the tray to access the tools bypulling up on the finger depression underthe jack symbol.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.

507

2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain thetool bag by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Turn the knob (A) on the jackcounterclockwise to release the jack andwheel blocks from the bracket.

4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer by turning the wing nut (C)counterclockwise.

The tools you will be using include the following:

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Jack Handle

D. Jack HandleExtensions

E. Wheel Wrench

508

To access the spare tire, refer to the followinggraphics and instructions:

A. Hoist AssemblyB. Hoist ShaftC. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole


E. Wheel WrenchF. Hoist Cable

G. Tire RetainerH. Spare Tire (Valve

Stem Pointed Down)I. Hoist Shaft

Access Hole

J. Hoist End ofExtension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. To reach the hoist shaft access cover (C),you will first need to remove the hitch cover.Remove it by turning the two fasteners locatedat the bottom of the cover counterclockwiseand then pull the cover down and rotatetowards you.

2. Remove the hoist shaft access cover (C) onthe bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).

509

3. Insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise andthen pull it to remove the spare tire lock.

4. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheel wrench (E)as shown.

510

5. Insert the open endof the extension (J)through the holein the rearbumper (I) (hoistshaft access hole).

Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbedsquare end of the extension is used to lowerthe spare tire.

6. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwiseto lower the spare tire (H) to the ground.Continue to turn the wheel wrench until thespare tire can be pulled out from underthe vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 518 for more information.

7. Use the wheelwrench hook thatallows you topull the hoist cabletowards you, toassist in reachingthe spare tire.

8. Tilt the tireretainer (G) at theend of the cablewhen the tirehas been lowered,so it can bepulled up throughthe wheel opening.

9. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

511

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions toremove the flat tire and raise the vehicle.

1. Remove the center cap by placing the chiselend of the wheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry the cap out.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts yet.

512

A. Front PositionB. Rear Position

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

513

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a fronttire of the vehicle, you will need to use thejack handle (B) and only one jack handleextension (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D) tothe jack handle extension (C). Attach thejack handle (B) to the jack (A). Position the jackon the frame behind the flat tire where theframe sections overlap (E). Turn the wheelwrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle.

Front Position

514

Raise the vehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for the sparetire to clear the ground.

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tireof the vehicle, you will need to use thejack handle (B) and both jack handleextensions (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D)to the jack handle extensions (C). Attachthe jack handle (B) to the jack (A).

Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle.Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise toraise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there is enough room forthe spare tire to clear the ground.

4. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

5. Take off the flat tire.Rear Position — 1500 Models

515

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

6. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

7. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare tire.

8. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then usethe wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until thewheel is held against the hub.

9. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

516

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 546for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 546for the wheel nut torque specification.

10. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire,you must also reinstall the either the center cap,or bolt-on hub cap, depending on what yourvehicle has. For center caps, place the cap on thewheel and tap it into place until it seats flushwith the wheel. The cap only goes on one way.Be sure to line up the tab on the center capwith the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hubcaps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheelnuts and then tighten by hand. Then use thewheel wrench to tighten.

517

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly which has a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle. For the secondary latchto work, the spare tire must be installed withthe valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools on page 522.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Check under thevehicle to see ifthe cable endis visible. If the cableis not visible,proceed to Step 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise untilyou hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

518

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 5 of Removing theSpare Tire and Tools on page 507.

5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheelwrench counterclockwise until approximately6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,with the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottomedge of the jack (A)on the wheelblocks (B),separating them sothat the jack isbalanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicle toward thefront of the rear bumper.

519

9. Position the center lift point of the jack underthe center of the spare tire.

10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the end fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tirestops moving upward and is held firmly inplace so that the secondary latch has releasedand the spare tire is balancing on the jack.

12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

520

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from under the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack with the other hand.

14. Use one hand to push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out from under thespare tire with the other hand. If the spare tireis hanging from the cable, insert the hoistend of the extension, and wheel wrench intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper andturn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare tire the rest of the way.

15. Tilt the tire retainerat the end of thecable and pullit through the wheelopening. Pull thetire out fromunder the vehicle.

16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft holein the bumper clockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hanging underthe vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare orflat tire using the hoist assembly until it hasbeen replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 512.

521

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time or with the valve stem pointingup may damage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tire repaired as soonas possible.

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphicsand instructions to help you:

A. Hoist AssemblyB. Hoist ShaftC. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole


E. Wheel WrenchF. Hoist Cable

522

G. Tire RetainerH. Spare Tire/Flat Tire

(Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist ShaftAccess Hole

J. Hoist End ofExtension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear ofthe vehicle with the valve stem pointed downand to the rear.

2. Tilt the tireretainer (G)downward andthrough the wheelopening. Makesure the retainer isfully seatedacross the undersideof the wheel.

3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D)and wheel wrench (E) as shown.

523

4. Insert the open endof the extension (J)through the holein the rearbumper (I) (hoistshaft access hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure theretainer is seated in the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear two clicks or feel itskip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.

10. Reinstall the hitch cover.

524

To store the tools, do the following.

A. Wheel BlocksB. Tool Bag with Jack

ToolsC. Retaining BracketD. Wing Nut Retaining

Tool Bag

E. JackF. Wing Nut Retaining

Wheel BlocksG. Wing Nut on Jack

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle,and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).

2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E)together with the wing nut (F).

3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in thedriver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until the jackis secured tight in the mounting bracket. Besure to position the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the toolbag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)clockwise to secure.

6. Return the storage tray to its original storedposition.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.

525

Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflatedspare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time,so check its inflation pressure regularly. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 488 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 392 for informationregarding proper tire inflation and loading yourvehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install,or store a spare tire, see Removing the FlatTire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 512and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Toolson page 522.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed back onto yourvehicle. This way, a spare tire will be availablein case you need it again.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tirethan the road tires, those originally installed on yourvehicle. This spare tire was developed for use onyour vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

526

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

527

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only beused on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forsoils, always try to remove them first with plainwater or club soda. Before cleaning, gently removeas much of the soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

528

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

529

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 561.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.GM-approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 535. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives.

530

All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or they couldstain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 530.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaningproducts from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 535.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage yourvehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces.Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that aremarked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

531

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

532

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

533

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your GM dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

534

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

535

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels andthe certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

536

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 106.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and not snow,etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. If the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and thencloses after a cool down period, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

537

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires causedby electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’thave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without – like theradio or cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is thecorrect amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block access door islocated on the driver’s side edge of the instrumentpanel.

Fuses Usage

LT DR Driver’s Side Power WindowCircuit Breaker

REAR SEAT Rear Seats

538

Fuses Usage

AUX PWR2 Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets

SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight

DDM Driver Door Module

CTSY Dome Lamps, Driver’s SideTurn Signal

LT STOP TRN Driver’s Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp

DIM Instrument Panel Back Lighting

RT STOP TRN Passenger’s Side Turn Signal,Stoplamp

BCM Body Control Module

UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)

LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)

STOP LAMPS Stoplamps, Center-High MountedStoplamp

REAR HVAC Rear Climate Controls

PDM Passenger Door Module, UniversalHome Remote System

Fuses Usage

AUX PWR Accessory Power Outlets

IS LPS Interior Lamps

UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)

OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,Power Liftgate

LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

COOLEDSEATS Not Used

DSM Driver Seat Module, RemoteKeyless Entry System

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DR Driver’s Door Harness Connection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector

539

Center Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe center instrument panel fuse block is locatedunderneath the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View


BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2




HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3



BRAKECLUTCH Brake Clutch Harness Connector

SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option UpfitterHarness Connector

Circuit Breaker Usage

CB1 Passenger’s Side Power WindowCircuit Breaker

CB2 Passenger’s Seat Circuit Breaker

CB3 Driver’s Seat Circuit Breaker

CB4 Not Used

540

Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse betweenyour thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

541

542

Fuses Usage

1 Not Used

2Electronic Stability SuspensionControl, Automatic Level ControlExhaust

3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls

5 Engine Control Module,Throttle Control

6 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensors

9 Anti-lock Brakes System 2

10 Trailer Back-up Lamps

11 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

12 Engine Control Module (Battery)

13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils(Right Side)

14 Transmission Control Module(Battery)

15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps

Fuses Usage

16 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

17 Air Conditioning Compressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19 Transmission Controls (Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

21 Not Used

22 Rear Washer

23 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils(Left Side)

24 Trailer Park Lamps

25 Driver’s Side Park Lamps

26 Passenger’s Side Park Lamps

27 Fog Lamps

28 Horn

29 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

30 Daytime Running Lamps

31 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp

543

Fuses Usage

32 Daytime Running Lamps 2

33 Sunroof

34 Key Ignition System, TheftDeterrent System

35 Windshield Wiper

36 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)

37 Electric Adjustable Pedals

38 Climate Controls (Battery)

39 Airbag System (Ignition)

40 Amplifier

41 Audio System

42 Four-Wheel Drive

43Miscellaneous (Ignition),Rear Vision Camera (If Equipped),Cruise Control

44 Liftgate Release

Fuses Usage

45 OnStar®, Rear SeatEntertainment Display

46 Instrument Panel Cluster

47 Not Used

48 Heated Steering Wheel

49 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),Compass-Temperature Mirror

50 Rear Defogger

51 Airbag System (Battery)

52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)

53 Cigarette Lighter, AuxiliaryPower Outlet

54 Automatic Level Control CompressorRelay, SEO Upfitter Usage

55 Climate Controls (Ignition)

56 Engine Control Module,Secondary Fuel Pump (Ignition)

544

J-Case Fuses Usage

60 Cooling Fan 1

61 Automatic Level Control Compressor

62 Heavy Duty Anti-lock Brake System

63 Cooling Fan 2

64 Anti-lock Brake System 1

65 Starter

66 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)

67 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1

68 Electric Running Boards

69 Heated Windshield Washer System

70 Not Used

71 Stud 1 (Trailer ConnectorBattery Power)

72 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1

73 Climate Control Blower

74 Power Liftgate Module

75 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2

Relays Usage

FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed

FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed

ENG EXH VLV Not Used

FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control

HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamps

FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUEL PMP Fuel Pump

PRK LAMP Parking Lamps

REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RUN/CRANK Switched Power

545

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 561 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricAir Conditioning Refrigerant

Regular 2.5 lbs 1.130 kgExtended 3.0 lbs 1.36 kg

Cooling System 18.1 qt 17.1 LEngine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L†Fuel Tank

Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 LExtended 31.5 gal 119.2 L

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 6.0 qt 5.7 LTransfer Case Fluid 1.5 qt 1.4 LWheel Nut Torque 140 lbft 190 Y†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the properoperating range.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 8 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

546

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 548Introduction ............................................... 548Maintenance Requirements ........................ 548Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 549Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 549Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 551Additional Required Services ..................... 554Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 555

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 557At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 558At Least Once a Month ............................. 558At Least Once a Year ............................... 559Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 561Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 563Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 564Maintenance Record .................................. 565

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

547

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

548

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

549

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 392.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 359.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 423.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 551 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 554 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 555 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench ® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 422.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

550

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 589.

Owner Checks and Services on page 557 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 561 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 563.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required foryour vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced assoon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engineoil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trainedservice technicians who will perform this workusing genuine GM parts and reset the system.

551

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 435 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

552

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 432. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 435. An Emission Control Service. • •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 437. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 496 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 558.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See Additional Required Serviceson page 554. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Check transfer case fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

553

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for looseor damaged components. • • • • • •

Vehicles without a filter restrictionindicator: Replace engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 437.

• • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

Change transfer case fluid.See footnote (m). • • •

Inspect evaporative control system.An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (g).

• • •

554

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage,transmission shift linkage, and parking brakecable guides. Control arm ball joints aremaintenance-free.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

555

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Visually check constant velocity joints, rubberboots, and axle seals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, door hinges, liftgate hinge, liftgatelinkage, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fueldoor hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware.More frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

556

(g) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, andcondition. Check that the purge valve worksproperly, if equipped. Replace as needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 445 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(m) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 561.

557

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 432 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 445 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Donot forget to check the spare tire. See Tires onpage 480 for further details. Check to makesure the spare tire is stored securely. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 506.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 496.

558

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake andthe regular brake. See Parking Brakeon page 152.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The vehicle should start only in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 152.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

559

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransmissionPark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll.Be ready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

560

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Hood and Liftgate Support Gas StrutServiceVisually inspect gas strut for signs of wear,corrosion, cracks, loss of lubricant, or otherdamage. Check the hold open ability of gas strut.If necessary, replace with genuine GM parts.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 432.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 445.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

561


Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Front andRear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer CaseManual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

Front AxlePropshaft

Spline

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,in Canada 10953511) or lubricantmeeting requirements ofGM 9985830.


Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Body DoorHinge Pins,

Tailgate Hingeand Linkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel Door

Hinge


Outer TailgateHandle Pivot

Points


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

562

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25313348 A1519C

Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12571164 41-985

Wiper Blades (ITTA Type)

Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15284095 —

Rear – 11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 15173728 —

563

Engine Drive Belt Routing

564

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 548. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 557 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

565

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



566




567




568

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 570Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 570Online Owner Center ................................. 573Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 573Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 574GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 575Roadside Assistance Program ................... 575Courtesy Transportation ............................. 579Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 582Collision Damage Repair ........................... 583

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 588Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 588Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 588Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 589Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 589

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

569

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to GMC. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the GMCConsumer Relations Manager by calling1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt). In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer Communicationby calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting GMC, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

570

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps One and Two, you should file withthe BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filling out a courtaction, use of the program is free of charge andyour case will generally be heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

571

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined insteps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program,c/o Customer Communication Centre,General Motors of Canada Limited, Mail Code:CA1-163-005, 1908 Colonel Sam Drive,Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

572

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual(United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use the TextTelephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

573

Customer Assistance OfficesGMC encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail GMC, the letter should beaddressed to:

United StatesGMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782(462-8782)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

CanadaGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas LocationsPlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except PuertoRico and U.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

574

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S. call, 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the GMC RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

575

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel maybe restricted. For safety reasons, propane andother alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealershipfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

• Dealer Locator Service: Information on thedealer nearest your location.

• Trip Routing: Your Roadside AssistanceRepresentative can provide you with specificinformation regarding this feature.

• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: YourRoadside Assistance Representative canprovide you with specific information regardingthis feature.

576

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along withany helpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We’ll make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expense

assistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

577

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, ourRoadside Assistance Representatives will explainany payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers call GMCRoadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782, texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

GMC and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. GMC and General Motors of Canadareserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

578

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

579

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

580

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local, and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible forfuel usage charges and may also be responsiblefor taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage,or rental usage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

581

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver controlthe vehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledevent data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, andlateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation of vehicleoccupants.

582

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, pleasecheck the OnStar® subscription service agreementor manual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

583

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new partsmade with the same materials and constructionmethods as the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

584

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 575 for moreinformation.

585

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of thereport for a nominal fee. In some stateswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report maynot be necessary. This is especially trueif there are no injuries and both vehicles aredriveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GMdealer or a private collision repair facility tofix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

586

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

587

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaPlace de Ville Tower C330 Sparks StreetOttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

588

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

589

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

590

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for currentand past model GM vehicles. To request an orderform, please specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

591

✍ NOTES

592

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 421Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 213Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ..................................................... 107Additives, Fuel ............................................ 424Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 537Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 143Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 437Air Conditioning ........................................... 214Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 230Readiness Light ....................................... 229

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 582

Airbag System ............................................... 90Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 107How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 99Passenger Sensing System ...................... 101Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 106What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 98

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................ 100When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 96Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 93

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 469All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 353Antenna, Rear Side Window ........................ 338Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 339Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 347Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 234Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 532Care of Safety Belts ................................ 530Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 534Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 531Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 526Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 528Finish Care .............................................. 531Finish Damage ......................................... 534Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 529

593

Appearance Care (cont.)Leather .................................................... 529Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 533Speaker Covers ....................................... 530Tires ........................................................ 533Underbody Maintenance ........................... 534Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 535Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 530Weatherstrips ........................................... 530Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper

Blades .................................................. 532Wood Panels ........................................... 530

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 214Audio System(s) .......................................... 272

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 335Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 338Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 338Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ................................................. 321Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 294Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 276Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 333Rear Side Window Antenna ..................... 338Setting the Time .............................. 274, 275Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 335

Audio System(s) (cont.)Understanding Radio Reception ............... 336XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 339

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 205Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 440Operation ................................................. 145

Autoride® ..................................................... 399

BBattery ........................................................ 463

Run-Down Protection ............................... 208Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 382Bench Seat, Split (60/40) .............................. 18Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 347Emergencies ............................................ 349Parking .................................................... 152System Warning Light .............................. 233

Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 143Brakes ........................................................ 459Braking ....................................................... 346Braking in Emergencies ............................... 349Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 139

594

Bucket Seats, Rear ....................................... 25Bulb Replacement ....................................... 476

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 476Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 473License Plate Lamps ................................ 477Replacement Bulbs .................................. 478Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 476Buying New Tires ........................................ 498

CCalibration ................................................... 158California Fuel ............................................. 424California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 421Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 546Carbon Monoxide ..... 126, 128, 156, 386, 400Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 530Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 338Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 338

Cargo Cover ............................................... 181

Cargo Management System ........................ 182Center Console Storage Area ...................... 179Center Front Passenger Position, Safety

Belts .......................................................... 52Chains, Tire ................................................. 504Charging System Light ................................ 232Check

Engine Light ............................................ 237Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 428Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 534Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 68Infants and Young Children ........................ 64Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 74Older Children ........................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position .................................................. 83Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position ................................. 85Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 86Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 72

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 214

595

CleaningAluminum Wheels .................................... 532Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 531Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 528Finish Care .............................................. 531Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 526Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 529Leather .................................................... 529Speaker Covers ....................................... 530Tires ........................................................ 533Underbody Maintenance ........................... 534Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 530Weatherstrips ........................................... 530Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper

Blades .................................................. 532Wood Panels ........................................... 530

Climate Control SystemDual Automatic ......................................... 214Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 222Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System, Electronic ................................ 223Collision Damage Repair ............................. 583Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 56Compass ..................................................... 158Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 135

Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 346Convenience Net ......................................... 180Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 236Heater, Engine ......................................... 144Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 448

Cooling System ........................................... 451Cruise Control ............................................. 200Cruise Control Light .................................... 242Cupholder(s) ................................................ 178Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 579Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .......................................... 573Customer Assistance Offices .................... 574Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 570GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 575Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 589Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government .......................................... 588Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ............................... 588Roadside Assistance Program .................. 575Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 589

596

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 205Defensive Driving ........................................ 342Delayed Locking .......................................... 123Differential, Locking ..................................... 349Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 422Dome Lamp Override .................................. 207Dome Lamps ............................................... 207Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 123Locks ....................................................... 122Power Door Locks ................................... 123Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 124Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 124

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 43

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 244DIC Operation and Displays ............ 245, 250DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 262DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 252

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 375City .......................................................... 380Defensive ................................................. 342

Driving (cont.)Drunken ................................................... 343Freeway ................................................... 381Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 384In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 376Off-Road .................................................. 359Recovery Hooks ....................................... 391Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 390Winter ...................................................... 386

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 214DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 321

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 537Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 540Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 538Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 538Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 537Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 541Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 537

597

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 437Battery ..................................................... 463Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 237Coolant .................................................... 445Coolant Heater ......................................... 144Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 236Drive Belt Routing .................................... 564Engine Compartment Overview ................ 430Exhaust ................................................... 156Fan Noise ................................................ 456Oil ........................................................... 432Oil Life System ........................................ 435Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 450Overheating ............................................. 448Starting .................................................... 141

Entry Lighting .............................................. 207Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 582Exit Lighting ................................................ 207Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 60Exterior Lamps ............................................ 203

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 437Finish Damage ............................................ 534Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 192Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 195Flat Tire ...................................................... 505Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 506Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 522Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 440Power Steering ........................................ 457Windshield Washer .................................. 458

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 242Fog Lamps .................................................. 206Front Axle ................................................... 471Front Reading Lamps .................................. 208Fuel ............................................................ 423

Additives .................................................. 424California Fuel .......................................... 424Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 428Filling Your Tank ...................................... 426Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 425Gage ....................................................... 243Gasoline Octane ...................................... 423

598

Fuel (cont.)Gasoline Specifications ............................ 424Low Warning Light ................................... 244

FusesCenter Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........ 540Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 538Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 538Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 541Windshield Wiper ..................................... 537

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 236Fuel ......................................................... 243Oil Pressure ............................................. 240Speedometer ........................................... 227Tachometer .............................................. 227Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 232

Garage Door Opener .......................... 166, 167Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 423Specifications ........................................... 424

Glove Box ................................................... 178GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 575

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 192Head Restraints ............................................ 16Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 473Headlamps

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 205Bulb Replacement .................................... 476Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 205Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 195Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 476High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 195On Reminder ........................................... 205

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 214Highbeam On Light ..................................... 242High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 490Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 383Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 384Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 428Release ................................................... 429

Horn ............................................................ 192How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 43

599

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 140Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 64Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 488Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 190Storage Area ............................................ 178

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 207Cluster ..................................................... 226

JJump Starting .............................................. 464

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 114Keys ........................................................... 113

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 482Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 208Dome ....................................................... 207

Lamps (cont.)Dome Lamp Override ............................... 207Exterior .................................................... 203Fog .......................................................... 206Front Reading .......................................... 208

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 74

Level Control ............................................... 399License Plate Lamps ................................... 477Liftgate, Power ............................................ 128Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 126Liftglass/Liftgate ........................................... 126Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 229Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 234Brake System Warning ............................. 233Charging System ..................................... 232Cruise Control .......................................... 242Fog Lamp ................................................ 242Highbeam On .......................................... 242Low Fuel Warning .................................... 244Malfunction Indicator ................................ 237Oil Pressure ............................................. 241Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 230Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 228Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 228Security ................................................... 241

600

Light (cont.)StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 235Tire Pressure ........................................... 236Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 242

LightingEntry ........................................................ 207Exit .......................................................... 207

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 392Locking Differential ...................................... 349Lockout Protection ....................................... 125Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 123Door ........................................................ 122Lockout Protection ................................... 125Power Door ............................................. 123Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 124Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 124

Loss of Control ........................................... 357Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 244Luggage Carrier .......................................... 179Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 554At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 558At Least Once a Month ............................ 558At Least Once a Year .............................. 559Introduction .............................................. 548Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 555Maintenance Record ................................ 565Maintenance Requirements ...................... 548Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 563Owner Checks and Services .................... 557Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 561Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 551Using ....................................................... 549Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 549

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 237Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 12Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 252Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ................................................. 158

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 161MyGMLink.com ............................................ 573

601

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 321New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 139Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 563

OOdometer .................................................... 227Odometer, Trip ............................................ 227Off-Road Driving .......................................... 359Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 355Oil

Engine ..................................................... 432Pressure Gage ......................................... 240Pressure Light .......................................... 241

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 435Older Children, Restraints ............................. 61Online Owner Center ................................... 573OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 164Other Warning Devices ................................ 192Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 222Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 213

OutsidePower Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 161

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 450

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 557Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 534Park Aid ...................................................... 208Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 153Shifting Out of ......................................... 154

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 208Brake ....................................................... 152Over Things That Burn ............................ 155

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 230Passenger Sensing System ......................... 101Passing ....................................................... 356PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 136PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 137

602

PowerAccessory Outlet(s) .................................. 213Door Locks .............................................. 123Electrical System ..................................... 537Liftgate ..................................................... 128Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 141Running Boards ....................................... 132Seat ............................................................ 9Steering Fluid .......................................... 457Windows .................................................. 133

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 60Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 124

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 42

RRadios ........................................................ 272

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 338Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 338Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ................................................. 321

Radios (cont.)Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 294Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 276Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 333Setting the Time .............................. 274, 275Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 335Understanding Reception ......................... 336

Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 197Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ............... 223Rear Axle .................................................... 470Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 124Rear Heated Seats ....................................... 17Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 56Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 333Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 321Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 53Rear Side Window Antenna ......................... 338Rear Storage Area ...................................... 180Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 199Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 158

Reclining Seatbacks, Power .......................... 14Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 561Recovery Hooks .......................................... 391

603

Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 398Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 114Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ... 116Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 512Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 507Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 478Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 588General Motors ........................................ 589United States Government ....................... 588

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ............... 108Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ................................................... 109Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 141Right Front Passenger Position, Safety

Belts .......................................................... 51Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 575Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 390Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 564Running Boards, Power ............................... 132Running the Engine While Parked ............... 157

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 228Pretensioners ............................................. 60Reminder Light ........................................ 228

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 530Center Front Passenger Position ................ 52Driver Position ........................................... 43How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 43Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ....................................................... 42Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 56Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 53Right Front Passenger Position .................. 51Safety Belt Extender .................................. 60Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 51Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 38Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 50

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 551Seats

60/40 Split Bench Seat .............................. 18Bucket Seats, Rear .................................... 25Head Restraints ......................................... 16Heated Seats ............................................. 11

604

Seats (cont.)Heated Seats - Rear .................................. 17Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 12Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 14Power Seats ................................................ 9Third Row Seat ......................................... 32

Secondary Latch System ............................. 518Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ......................... 85Rear Seat Position ..................................... 83Right Front Seat Position ........................... 86

Security Light .............................................. 241Service ........................................................ 420

Accessories and Modifications .................. 421Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 423California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 421Doing Your Own Work ............................. 422Engine Soon Light ................................... 237Publications Ordering Information ............. 589

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 106Setting the Time ................................. 274, 275Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 533Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 153Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 154Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 50

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 194Spare Tire ................................................... 526

Installing .................................................. 512Removing ................................................ 507Storing ..................................................... 522

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 546Speedometer ............................................... 227Split Bench Seat (60/40) ............................... 18StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 349StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 235Starting Your Engine ................................... 141Steering ...................................................... 353Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 335Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 193Storage Areas

Cargo Management System ..................... 182Center Console Storage Area ................... 179Convenience Net ..................................... 180Cupholder(s) ............................................ 178Glove Box ................................................ 178Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 178Luggage Carrier ....................................... 179Rear Storage Area ................................... 180

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 390Sun Visors .................................................. 134Sunroof ....................................................... 185

605

TTachometer ................................................. 227Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-upLamps .................................................. 476

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 335Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 134

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 135PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 136PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 137

Third Row Seat ............................................. 32Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 143Tilt Wheel .................................................... 193Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 236Tires ........................................................... 480

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 532Buying New Tires ..................................... 498Chains ..................................................... 504Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 506Cleaning .................................................. 533Different Size ........................................... 500High-Speed Operation .............................. 490If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 505Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 488

Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ............................ 496Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 512Pressure Monitor System ......................... 490Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 512Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 507Secondary Latch System ......................... 518Spare Tire ................................................ 526Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 522Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 482Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 485Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 501Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 502Wheel Replacement ................................. 503When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 497

Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 150Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 242Towing

Recreational Vehicle ................................. 398Towing a Trailer ....................................... 400Your Vehicle ............................................. 398

TractionLocking Differential ................................... 349StabiliTrak® System ................................. 349

TrailerRecommendations .................................... 415

606

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 440

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 145Trip Odometer ............................................. 227Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 194Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 193

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 208Understanding Radio Reception ................... 336Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 501Universal Home Remote System ........ 166, 167

Operation ........................................ 168, 174

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 346Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 392Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 262

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 582

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 536Service Parts Identification Label .............. 536

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 222Visors .......................................................... 134Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 232

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 225Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 252Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 192Other Warning Devices ............................ 192Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 502Different Size ........................................... 500Replacement ............................................ 503

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 72

607

Windows ..................................................... 132Power ...................................................... 133

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 532Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 197Washer .................................................... 198Washer Fluid ........................................... 458Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 478Wiper Fuses ............................................ 537Wipers ..................................................... 196

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 199Winter Driving ............................................. 386

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 319XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 339

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 549

608

Date post:	21-Mar-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times

2007 GMC Yukon Denali/Yukon XL Denali Owner Manual M · 2020-03-17 · Safety Warnings and Symbols...

Documents